<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Kautzman&#039;s AP GO PO Blog &#187; A MUST READ</title>
	<atom:link href="http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/category/a-must-read/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org</link>
	<description>Mt. Spokane High School AP Government &#38; Politics</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 07 Dec 2009 17:58:07 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<generator>http://wordpress.org/?v=2.8.2</generator>
	<language>en</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>hourly</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>1</sy:updateFrequency>
			<item>
		<title>CE Week #14:  &#8220;New Rules for Congress Curb but Don’t End Paid Trips&#8221;  Dec. 7th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/07/ce-week-14-new-rules-for-congress-curb-but-don%e2%80%99t-end-paid-trips-dec-7th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/07/ce-week-14-new-rules-for-congress-curb-but-don%e2%80%99t-end-paid-trips-dec-7th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 07 Dec 2009 17:31:41 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1259</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[December 7, 2009
By ERIC LIPTON and ERIC LICHTBLAU

WASHINGTON — Representative F. James Sensenbrenner Jr., a Wisconsin Republican, toured a prince’s vineyard and castle in Liechtenstein and spent an afternoon at a ski resort in the Alps — all at the expense of a group of European companies.
Representative Danny K. Davis, an Illinois Democrat, got the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>December 7, 2009</p>
<p>By ERIC LIPTON and ERIC LICHTBLAU</strong></p>
<p><img src="http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/files/2009/12/07trips.graphic.jpg" alt="07trips.graphic" title="07trips.graphic" width="190" height="126" class="aligncenter size-full wp-image-1260" /></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — Representative F. James Sensenbrenner Jr., a Wisconsin Republican, toured a prince’s vineyard and castle in Liechtenstein and spent an afternoon at a ski resort in the Alps — all at the expense of a group of European companies.</p>
<p>Representative Danny K. Davis, an Illinois Democrat, got the dignitary treatment when a big donor flew him to Inner Mongolia to lobby for a new medical supplies factory in rural China.</p>
<p>And Representative Ileana Ros-Lehtinen, a Florida Republican, on another privately sponsored trip, stayed at the historic King David Hotel in Jerusalem and attended a gala party near the Western Wall as part of a weeklong conference that lobbyists and executives paid as much as $18,500 to attend.</p>
<p>Despite changes intended to curb <strong>Congressional junkets</strong>, some lawmakers and even their families continue to take trips hosted by private groups and companies that revel in their access to Washington power brokers.</p>
<p>An examination by The New York Times of 1,150 trips shows that some of them bent or broke rules adopted in 2007 to limit corporate influence in Washington. Others exploited glaring loopholes in the guidelines, enacted with much fanfare after scandals involving the disgraced lobbyist Jack Abramoff.</p>
<p>While <strong>lobbyists are not supposed to pay for a lawmaker’s travel</strong>, for example, Mr. Sensenbrenner’s $14,708 trip to Liechtenstein and Germany in 2009 was organized by a nonprofit group whose president is a lobbyist. It was underwritten by European companies that, in many cases, lobby in the United States.</p>
<p>Another rule limits travel paid for by companies employing lobbyists to just two nights. This forced Mr. Davis to make a quick turnaround when he flew to China this year. He changed clothes in a van on a highway before meeting with officials there.</p>
<p>Mr. Davis said he was exhausted by the end of his journey. He said he saw nothing wrong with a businessman and big financial contributor flying him to help close a private business deal.</p>
<p>“He’s a guy that I really admire,” Mr. Davis said of Willie Wilson, president of Omar Medical Supplies, which got its factory. Still, Mr. Davis acknowledged, “It’s not going to create jobs in Illinois.”</p>
<p>The rules are filled with odd contradictions. <strong>Lobbyists themselves are not allowed to pay for trips, but their corporate clients can. And lobbyists are permitted to give huge sums to nonprofit groups that can sponsor travel. They can also travel to destinations and meet the lawmakers once they get there, though they cannot go on the same plane.</strong></p>
<p>Seizing on the loopholes, <strong>lobbyists and the companies that employ them are still underwriting trips by dozens of members of Congress, particularly those in the House</strong>, the Times review shows. The companies finance much of this travel indirectly, getting around the spirit of the rules by giving money to nonprofits, some of which seem to exist largely to sponsor trips. In fact, the rules may have had the unexpected effect of obscuring who is actually paying for a lawmaker’s junket.</p>
<p>“If a nonprofit group is essentially just being used as a pass-through entity for corporate players that otherwise could not sponsor an event, that is a fraud and that is not allowed,” said Representative Zoe Lofgren, the California Democrat who leads the House ethics committee.</p>
<p>The rules have had some real impact. Privately financed travel for members of the House has dropped to fewer than 400 trips in the first 10 months of this year, compared with 1,100 in the same period in 2005. The drop in Senate travel has been even greater: Senators took just 24 trips in the first 10 months of this year, compared with 189 in the same period in 2005. Democrats and Republicans traveled proportionate to their numbers in Congress.</p>
<p>The universe of regular sponsors has been reduced to fewer than a dozen big foundations and associations, the Times analysis shows. <strong>Many of the trips are sponsored by organizations with ideological and policy agendas, rather than commercial interests. Most of those rely, at least in part, on corporate financing to underwrite trips for lawmakers.</strong></p>
<p>Their internal policies vary widely in how they seek to insulate the trips from corporate influence. <strong>The Aspen Institute</strong>, for instance, tries to block corporate influence-peddling by barring lobbyists from its events and declining corporate contributions for the trips, a spokesman said.</p>
<p>But not all groups are as strict. Some nonprofits take money from major corporations with lobbyists, like <strong>Lockheed Martin, the defense contractor</strong>, <strong>Eli Lilly, the drug company, and Volkswagen, the automaker</strong>, to sponsor events for lawmakers during the trips.</p>
<p>When Mr. Sensenbrenner and Representative Tom Price, Republican of Georgia, traveled to Liechtenstein in February to learn about its banking system, they attended business meetings. But they and their wives also visited the Malbun ski resort, stayed at a first-class hotel and toured the wine cellar at the prince of Liechtenstein’s historic vineyard, according to their itinerary.</p>
<p>The cost of the trip — $14,708 for Mr. Sensenbrenner and his wife alone — was picked up by a nonprofit group called the International Management and Development Institute. Just since 2005, International Management has paid for 34 trips to Europe for lawmakers and staff members, totaling more than $400,000, including five for Mr. Sensenbrenner to Germany, Liechtenstein, Norway and France.</p>
<p>The trips were largely financed by contributions from companies like Deutsche Bank and Lufthansa, which have American lobbyists and therefore would have been prohibited from directly paying for the weeklong trips. Top executives at these companies were often offered special meetings with the lawmakers. The president of the institute, Don Bonker, is a Washington lobbyist, whose firm, APCO Worldwide, has served as a registered agent for the German government.</p>
<p>Foreign agents are also prohibited from sponsoring travel.</p>
<p>Because International Management is an American nonprofit and does not retain a lobbyist, none of the rules applied. As a result, a group of big corporations were able to indirectly pay for a weeklong visit to Europe, and their executives got to meet with powerful lawmakers.</p>
<p>Mr. Bonker, the lobbyist, and Mr. Sensenbrenner, the congressman, said they stuck to the rules, and that the trips had been approved beforehand by the House ethics staff.</p>
<p>“Many organizations that are seeking to educate Congressional leaders on a range of topics receive money from a variety of sources to better enable them to do so, without any cost to taxpayers,” Wendy Riemann, a spokeswoman for Mr. Sensenbrenner, said in a written statement.</p>
<p>Like International Management, the Franklin Center for Global Policy Exchange seems to exist largely to sponsor Congressional travel. The group’s Web site lists an “honorary” board made up of members of Congress, but it does not disclose a separate board that includes lobbyists from the nuclear power and liquor industries, among others. Nor does it disclose that private executives and lobbyists pay to attend the events the group sponsors for members of Congress in the Netherlands and elsewhere.</p>
<p>Another company, Doheny Global, of Manhattan, used lawmakers as a lure to attract paying attendance at a meeting in Israel.</p>
<p>Last year Doheny, an energy and real estate investment firm, invited private equity and energy industry executives to pay $18,500 per person to hobnob with “an elite cadre” of public and private powerbrokers, including Ms. Ros-Lehtinen, the Florida congresswoman. Doheny paid to fly her and her husband in for the weeklong gathering in Tel Aviv and Jerusalem, and she appeared in a promotional video calling Irwin G. Katsof, the company’s founder, “a matchmaker for business” who “enjoys great credibility in Congress.”</p>
<p>Ms. Ros-Lehtinen declined to comment on the trips.</p>
<p>The invitation to the 2008 event, which also featured Senator Ben Nelson, Democrat of Nebraska, came from a host committee that included registered lobbyists. Depending on how much of a role that committee had in setting up the event, the trip may have violated House rules, which prohibit lawmakers from taking multiday trips “planned, organized, requested or arranged by a lobbyist.”</p>
<p>It takes a little digging to find the role big companies with lobbyists played in sponsoring <strong>the Congressional Black Caucus</strong>’s four-day 2008 conference at a casino resort in Tunica, Miss.</p>
<p>Each of the 14 House members submitted a detailed agenda for approval to the ethics committee. It listed social events like a golf outing, but it also included serious topics like health care and global warming.</p>
<p>But there is something missing from the agenda sent to the ethics committee.</p>
<p>A different copy handed out to the caucus members is much the same — except for the line under each event that names a corporate sponsor. A workshop focused on health care included the words “Sponsored by Eli Lily,” the big drug company with a huge stake in health care legislation. Edison Electric Institute, an association of power plant owners, hosted the global warming seminar. Wal-Mart sponsored a clinic to teach lawmakers and other attendees how to skeet shoot; after the lessons came a competition sponsored by the International Longshoremen’s Association.</p>
<p>William A. Kirk, the Washington lawyer and lobbyist who helped arrange the weekend, said the sponsor companies did not directly pay for the events or member travel. They became sponsors by contributing to the general fund of the caucus’s Political Education and Leadership Institute, which is a nonprofit. Money from the general fund, however, paid for hotels and other accommodations. Members were responsible for their own flights, though some used campaign funds.</p>
<p><strong>The House ethics committee</strong> is separately investigating another event attended by members of the caucus, a November 2008 conference at a resort on St. Maarten in the Caribbean, which included corporate sponsors like American Airlines and Citigroup.</p>
<p>Mr. Davis’s trip to China was not so luxurious. But it may be the clearest example of a company openly paying a lawmaker to travel on purely commercial business.</p>
<p>Willie Wilson, the owner of Omar Medical Supplies, wanted to build a factory to make latex gloves to sell in the United States, and he thought Mr. Davis could help him negotiate better terms with the Chinese. Omar is not located in Mr. Davis’s district, but Mr. Wilson is a longtime friend who, along with his wife, has contributed $37,000 to Mr. Davis’s political causes in the last decade. Omar had also hired Richard Boykin, Mr. Davis’s former chief of staff, as lobbyist in Washington. And in between two trips to China Mr. Davis took in 2008 and 2009, Mr. Boykin held a fund-raiser for him.</p>
<p>The fact that Mr. Boykin actually traveled with Mr. Davis on the 2008 trip may have violated the rules, since lobbyists are not permitted to accompany members on trips.</p>
<p>Local officials, photographers, and a woman in traditional Mongolian garb greeted the visitors with flowers and gifts, before Mr. Wilson affixed his signature to the joint venture with Mr. Davis looking on. Mr. Wilson said Mr. Davis’s presence helped seal the deal.</p>
<p>“It was good to have a United States congressman speaking highly of you,” he said.<br />
<strong><br />
Ron Nixon and Derek Willis contributed research.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/07/ce-week-14-new-rules-for-congress-curb-but-don%e2%80%99t-end-paid-trips-dec-7th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #14:  &#8220;C.I.A. to Expand Use of Drones in Pakistan&#8221;  Dec. 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/04/ce-week-14-c-i-a-to-expand-use-of-drones-in-pakistan-dec-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/04/ce-week-14-c-i-a-to-expand-use-of-drones-in-pakistan-dec-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 04 Dec 2009 16:24:29 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1243</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By SCOTT SHANE of The New York Times
WASHINGTON — Two weeks ago in Pakistan, Central Intelligence Agency sharpshooters killed eight people suspected of being militants of the Taliban and Al Qaeda, and wounded two others in a compound that was said to be used for terrorist training.
Then, the job in North Waziristan done, the C.I.A. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By SCOTT SHANE of The New York Times</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — Two weeks ago in Pakistan, Central Intelligence Agency sharpshooters killed eight people suspected of being militants of the Taliban and Al Qaeda, and wounded two others in a compound that was said to be used for terrorist training.</p>
<p>Then, the job in North Waziristan done, the C.I.A. officers could head home from the agency’s Langley, Va., headquarters, facing only the hazards of the area’s famously snarled suburban traffic.</p>
<p>It was only the latest strike by the agency’s covert program to kill operatives of Al Qaeda, the Taliban and their allies using Hellfire missiles fired from Predator aircraft controlled from half a world away.</p>
<p>The White House has authorized an expansion of the C.I.A.’s drone program in Pakistan’s lawless tribal areas, officials said this week, to parallel the president’s decision, announced Tuesday, to send 30,000 more troops to Afghanistan. American officials are talking with Pakistan about the possibility of striking in Baluchistan for the first time — a controversial move since it is outside the tribal areas — because that is where Afghan Taliban leaders are believed to hide.</p>
<p>By increasing covert pressure on Al Qaeda and its allies in Pakistan, while ground forces push back the Taliban’s advances in Afghanistan, American officials hope to eliminate any haven for militants in the region.</p>
<p>One of Washington’s worst-kept secrets, the drone program is quietly hailed by counterterrorism officials as a resounding success, eliminating key terrorists and throwing their operations into disarray. But despite close cooperation from Pakistani intelligence, the program has generated public anger in Pakistan, and some counterinsurgency experts wonder whether it does more harm than good.</p>
<p>Assessments of the drone campaign have relied largely on sketchy reports in the Pakistani press, and some have estimated several hundred civilian casualties. Saying that such numbers are wrong, one government official agreed to speak about the program on the condition of anonymity. About 80 missile attacks from drones in less than two years have killed “more than 400” enemy fighters, the official said, offering a number lower than most estimates but in the same range. His account of collateral damage, however, was strikingly lower than many unofficial counts: “We believe the number of civilian casualties is just over 20, and those were people who were either at the side of major terrorists or were at facilities used by terrorists.”</p>
<p>That claim, which the official said reflected the Predators’ ability to loiter over a target feeding video images for hours before and after a strike, is likely to come under scrutiny from human rights advocates. Tom Parker, policy director for counterterrorism at Amnesty International, said he found the estimate “unlikely,” noting that reassessments of strikes in past wars had usually found civilian deaths undercounted. Mr. Parker said his group was uneasy about drone attacks anyway: “Anything that dehumanizes the process makes it easier to pull the trigger.”</p>
<p>Yet with few other tools to use against Al Qaeda, the drone program has enjoyed bipartisan support in Congress and was escalated by the Obama administration in January. More C.I.A. drone attacks have been conducted under President Obama than under President George W. Bush. The political consensus in support of the drone program, its antiseptic, high-tech appeal and its secrecy have obscured just how radical it is. For the first time in history, a civilian intelligence agency is using robots to carry out a military mission, selecting people for killing in a country where the United States is not officially at war.</p>
<p>In the months after the Sept. 11, 2001, attacks, C.I.A. officials were not eager to embrace killing terrorists from afar with video-game controls, said one former intelligence official. “There was also a lot of reluctance at Langley to get into a lethal program like this,” the official said. But officers grew comfortable with the program as they checked off their hit list more than a dozen notorious figures, including Abu Khabab al-Masri, a Qaeda expert on explosives; Rashid Rauf, accused of being the planner of the 2006 trans-Atlantic airliner plot; and Baitullah Mehsud, leader of the Pakistani Taliban.</p>
<p>The drone warfare pioneered by the C.I.A. in Pakistan and the Air Force in Iraq and Afghanistan is the leading edge of a wave of push-button combat that will raise legal, moral and political questions around the world, said P. W. Singer, a scholar at the Brookings Institution and author of the book “Wired for War.”</p>
<p>Forty-four countries have unmanned aircraft for surveillance, Mr. Singer said. So far, only the United States and Israel have used the planes for strikes, but that number will grow.</p>
<p>“We’re talking about a technology that’s not going away,” he said.</p>
<p>There is little doubt that “warheads on foreheads,” in the macho lingo of intelligence officers, have been disruptive to the militants in Pakistan, removing leaders and fighters, slowing movement and sowing dissension as survivors hunt for spies who may be tipping off the Americans. Yet the drones are unpopular with many Pakistanis, who see them as a violation of their country’s sovereignty — one reason the United States refuses to officially acknowledge the attacks. A poll by Gallup Pakistan last summer found only 9 percent of Pakistanis in favor of the attacks and 67 percent against, with a majority ranking the United States as a greater threat to Pakistan than its archrival, India, or the Pakistani Taliban.</p>
<p>Interestingly, residents of the tribal areas where the attacks actually occur, who bitterly resent the militants’ brutal rule, are far less critical of the drones, said Farhat Taj, an anthropologist with the Aryana Institute for Regional Research and Advocacy. A study of 550 professional people living in the tribal areas was conducted late last year by the institute, a Pakistani research group. About half of those interviewed called the drone strikes “accurate,” 6 in 10 said they damaged militant organizations, and almost as many denied they increased anti-Americanism.</p>
<p>Dr. Taj, who lived at the edge of the tribal areas until 2002, said residents would prefer to be protected by the Pakistani Army. “But they feel powerless toward the militants and they see the drones as their liberator,” she said.</p>
<p>In an interview this week with the German magazine Der Spiegel, the Pakistani prime minister, Syed Yousuf Raza Gilani, said the drone strikes “do no good, because they boost anti-American resentment throughout the country.” American officials say that despite such public comments, Pakistan privately supplies crucial intelligence, proposes targets and allows the Predators to take off from a base in Baluchistan.</p>
<p>Pakistan’s public criticism of the drone attacks has muddied the legal status of the strikes, which United States officials say are justified as defensive measures against groups that have vowed to attack Americans. Philip Alston, the United Nations’ special rapporteur for extrajudicial executions and a prominent critic of the program, has said it is impossible to judge whether the program violates international law without knowing whether Pakistan permits the incursions, how targets are selected and what is done to minimize civilian casualties.</p>
<p>A spokesman for the C.I.A., Paul Gimigliano, defended the program without quite acknowledging its existence. “While the C.I.A. does not comment on reports of Predator operations, the tools we use in the fight against Al Qaeda and its violent allies are exceptionally accurate, precise and effective,” he said. “Press reports suggesting that hundreds of Pakistani civilians have somehow been killed as a result of alleged or supposed U.S. activities are — to state what should be obvious under any circumstances — flat-out false.”</p>
<p>From 2004 to 2007, the C.I.A. carried out only a handful of strikes. But pressure from the Congressional intelligence committees, greater confidence in the technology and reduced resistance from Pakistan led to a sharp increase starting in the summer of 2008.</p>
<p>Former C.I.A. officials say there is a rigorous protocol for identifying militants, using video from the Predators, intercepted cellphone calls and tips from Pakistani intelligence, often originating with militants’ resentful neighbors. Operators at C.I.A. headquarters can use the drones’ video feed to study a militant’s identity and follow fighters to training areas or weapons caches, officials say. Targeters often can see where wives and children are located in a compound or wait until fighters drive away from a house or village before they are hit.</p>
<p>Mr. Mehsud’s wife and parents-in-law were killed with him, but that was an exceptional decision prompted by the rare chance to attack him, the official said.</p>
<p>The New America Foundation, a policy group in Washington, studied press reports and estimated that since 2006 at least 500 militants and 250 civilians had been killed in the drone strikes. A separate count, by The Long War Journal, found 885 militants’ deaths and 94 civilians’.</p>
<p>But the government official insisted on the accuracy of his far lower figure of approximately 20 civilian deaths, noting that the Pakistani press rarely reported local protests about civilian deaths, routine occurrences when bombs in Afghanistan have gone astray.</p>
<p>Daniel S. Markey, who studies South Asia at the Council on Foreign Relations, said the comments of two anti-Taliban tribal leaders he spoke with on a recent trip to Pakistan seemed to capture the paradox of the drones.</p>
<p>The tribal leaders told him that the strikes were eliminating dangerous militants while causing few civilian deaths. But they pleaded for a halt to the attacks, saying the strikes stirred up anger toward the United States and the Pakistani Army, and “made them look like puppets,” he said.</p>
<p>“It gave the lie,” Mr. Markey said, “to the argument we’ve made for a long time: that this fight is theirs, too.”</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/04/ce-week-14-c-i-a-to-expand-use-of-drones-in-pakistan-dec-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>BLOG RECOVERY CE Week #13:  &#8220;Old Clemency May Be Issue for Huckabee&#8221;  Dec. 1st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-old-clemency-may-be-issue-for-huckabee-dec-1st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-old-clemency-may-be-issue-for-huckabee-dec-1st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 01 Dec 2009 14:49:31 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1230</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By KATE ZERNIKE
When Mike Huckabee, a former Southern Baptist minister then serving as governor of Arkansas, granted clemency to Maurice Clemmons nine years ago, he cited his age: Mr. Clemmons was 16 when he began the crime spree for which he was sentenced to more than 100 years in prison.
Now, Mr. Clemmons is being sought [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By KATE ZERNIKE</strong></p>
<p>When <strong>Mike Huckabee</strong>, a former Southern Baptist minister then serving as governor of Arkansas, granted clemency to Maurice Clemmons nine years ago, he cited his age: Mr. Clemmons was 16 when he began the crime spree for which he was sentenced to more than 100 years in prison.</p>
<p>Now, Mr. Clemmons is being sought as the suspect in the killing of four uniformed police officers, execution-style, on Sunday as they sat in a coffee shop near Tacoma, Wash., writing reports.</p>
<p>Mr. Huckabee, now a Fox News talk-show host, has been leading the pack of <strong>possible Republican contenders for president in 2012</strong>. But the killings of the police officers are focusing renewed attention on his long-contentious record of <strong>pardoning convicts</strong> or <strong>commuting their sentences</strong>.</p>
<p>In a decade as governor beginning in 1996, Mr. Huckabee did so twice as many times as his three predecessors combined. He typically gave little explanation for individual pardons. But he spoke often of his belief in redemption, based on a strong religious belief that even criminals are capable of changing their lives and often deserve a second chance. He also raised concerns about the fairness of the Arkansas justice system.</p>
<p>The commutation of Mr. Clemmons’s sentence was routine enough that it failed to make a list of Mr. Huckabee’s 10 “most publicized” prison commutations compiled by an Arkansas newspaper in August 2004. And if it turns out to be a case in which a parole had gone bad, it will be difficult to pin responsibility solely on Mr. Huckabee, because many others made decisions that kept Mr. Clemmons out of prison.</p>
<p>Mr. Clemmons had been convicted for a series of burglaries and robberies that began in 1989, and would not have been eligible for parole until 2021. He applied for clemency in 2000, writing in a petition to Mr. Huckabee that he had simply fallen in with a bad crowd in a bad neighborhood as a teenager, and that he “had learned through the ‘school of hard knocks’ to appreciate and respect the rights of others.”</p>
<p>Mr. Huckabee commuted his sentence, making him eligible for immediate parole. Within six months, Mr. Clemmons violated the conditions of his parole, returning to prison in July 2001 for aggravated robbery. When he was paroled again by the state in 2004, the police in Little Rock served a warrant on him related to a 2001 robbery. But a lawyer for Mr. Clemmons argued that too much time had elapsed since the warrant was issued, and prosecutors dropped the charges.</p>
<p>Mr. Huckabee, who rode a brand of prairie populism to finish second in the Republican presidential primaries in 2008, <strong>granted more than 1,000 pardons or clemency requests as governor</strong>. As his reputation for granting clemency spread, more convicts applied. Aides said he read each file personally.</p>
<p>In most cases, he followed the recommendation of the parole board, but in several cases he overrode the objections of prosecutors, judges and victims’ families. And in several, he followed recommendations for clemency from Baptist preachers who had been longtime supporters.</p>
<p>Prosecutors told him he was ignoring his responsibility to explain to citizens why he was setting free convicted murderers and rapists. His response, some of them say, was to blame others and strike out against his critics — an off-note from a man they consider a gifted politician.</p>
<p>“Victims groups were pretty well ignored, along with boots-on-the-streets law enforcement and good citizens who sit on these juries,” said Larry Jegley, who objected to Mr. Clemmons’s clemency request as the prosecuting attorney for Pulaski County, where he was convicted.</p>
<p>Robert Herzfeld, then the prosecuting attorney of Saline County, wrote a letter to Governor Huckabee in January 2004, saying his policy on clemency was “fatally flawed” and suggesting that he should announce specific reasons for granting clemency. Mr. Huckabee’s chief aide on clemency wrote back: “The governor read your letter and laughed out loud. He wanted me to respond to you. I wish you success as you cut down on your caffeine consumption.”</p>
<p>“It was all a very personal issue for him,” said Mr. Herzfeld, who later sued successfully to overturn one of Mr. Huckabee’s clemency decisions, which would have set free a man convicted in a bludgeoning death. “It was always about how I was trying to get him or another prosecutor was trying to get him, not about how to do it right. He’s brilliant politically and very likable, but it seems like there’s a blind spot on this issue.”</p>
<p>With Mr. Clemmons, political consultants say Mr. Huckabee may have hit his Willie Horton moment</p>
<p>“As a front-runner, obviously with circumstances like this, it’s out there as a big issue,” said Ed Rollins, the manager of Mr. Huckabee’s 2008 presidential campaign.</p>
<p>Mr. Huckabee survived a similar moment before, during the <strong>Iowa caucuses</strong>, when former <strong>Gov. Mitt Romney of Massachusetts</strong> criticized his judgment in the case of Wayne DuMond, a convicted rapist who raped and killed a woman 11 months after being paroled in Arkansas.</p>
<p>Mr. Huckabee said that he had opposed clemency, and that it had been his predecessor, Jim Guy Tucker, who had made Mr. DuMond eligible for parole by reducing his sentence. “If anyone needs to get a Willie Horton out of it, it’s Jim Guy Tucker and the Democrat Party and it ain’t me,” he said to reporters at the time.</p>
<p>But Mr. Huckabee had come into office saying he intended to commute Mr. DuMond’s sentence. He later denied the request only as the state’s board granted Mr. DuMond parole. Members of the board later said they had been pressured by the governor.</p>
<p>Mr. Clemmons’s case packs more potency: the facts of Mr. Huckabee’s involvement in the clemency decision are less in dispute, and the crime has played over and over on national television.</p>
<p>“It’s the same issue yet again,” said Whit Ayres, a Republican pollster. “The difference this time is that Governor Huckabee would start with greater visibility and higher in the polls, which always enhances and exacerbates any possible criticisms.”</p>
<p>Should he run, there are many prosecutors and victims’ advocates in Arkansas who say they are ready to argue to the national news media that this is just one of the cases where Mr. Huckabee used poor judgment and ignored an inmate’s history of criminal behavior in deciding for clemency. Through a spokeswoman, Mr. Huckabee declined requests for an interview, but a statement from the “press team” on the Web site of his political action committee said that should Mr. Clemmons be found responsible for the shootings, “it will be the result of a series of failures in the criminal justice system in both Arkansas and Washington State.”</p>
<p>“He was recommended for and received commutation of his original sentence from 1990,” the statement said. “This commutation made him parole-eligible and he was then paroled by the parole board once they determined he met the conditions at that time.”</p>
<p>On Sunday, before the shooting, Mr. Huckabee sounded ambivalent on Fox News about running for president, saying he liked his role at the network and wanted to be sure that, unlike in 2008, he would receive support from the Republican establishment.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-old-clemency-may-be-issue-for-huckabee-dec-1st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>6</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>BLOG RECOVERY  CE Week #13:  &#8220;No Big Cost Rise in U.S. Premiums Is Seen in Study&#8221;  Dec. 1st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-no-big-cost-rise-in-u-s-premiums-is-seen-in-study-dec-1st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-no-big-cost-rise-in-u-s-premiums-is-seen-in-study-dec-1st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 01 Dec 2009 14:44:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1228</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN
WASHINGTON — The Congressional Budget Office said Monday that the Senate health bill could significantly reduce costs for many people who buy health insurance on their own, and that it would not substantially change premiums for the vast numbers of Americans who receive coverage from large employers.
The eagerly awaited [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — <strong>The Congressional Budget Office</strong> said Monday that the Senate health bill could significantly reduce costs for many people who buy health insurance on their own, and that it would not substantially change premiums for the vast numbers of Americans who receive coverage from large employers.</p>
<p>The eagerly awaited report, which came as the Senate began debate on the legislation, provided Democrats with ammunition against Republicans who have criticized the bill on the ground that it would raise costs for a majority of Americans.</p>
<p><strong>Centrist Democrats like Senator Evan Bayh of Indiana</strong>, whose votes are vital to President Obama’s hopes of getting the bill approved, had feared that the measure would drive up costs for people with employer-sponsored coverage. After reading the budget office report, Mr. Bayh said he was reassured on that point.</p>
<p>Before taking account of federal subsidies to help people buy insurance on their own, the budget office said the bill would tend to drive up premiums. But as a result of the subsidies, it said, most people in the individual insurance market would see their costs decline, compared with the costs expected under current law. The subsidies, a main feature of the bill, would cost the government nearly $450 billion in the next 10 years and would cover nearly two-thirds of premiums for people who receive them.</p>
<p>For most people who get health insurance through employers — five-sixths of the total market — the budget office concluded that there would be little change in their premiums relative to the amounts projected under current law.</p>
<p>Administration officials said the report provided a lift to the bill, which embodies Mr. Obama’s top domestic priority.</p>
<p>“The C.B.O. has rendered a fundamental judgment that this will reduce the deficit and reduce people’s premium costs,” said Rahm Emanuel, the White House chief of staff, who huddled with Senate Democratic leaders on Capitol Hill on Monday. “All the Republican leadership will guarantee you is the status quo.”</p>
<p>But Republican senators like <strong>Charles E. Grassley of Iowa and Mitch McConnell of Kentucky, the minority leader</strong>, said the report validated their concerns. They focused on the prediction that unsubsidized premiums in the individual insurance market, less than a fifth of those with health insurance, would rise an average of 10 percent to 13 percent.</p>
<p>“The analysis by the Congressional Budget Office confirms our worst fears,” Mr. Grassley said. “Millions of people who are expecting lower costs as a result of health reform will end up paying more in the form of higher premiums. For large and small employers that have been struggling for years with skyrocketing health insurance premiums, C.B.O. concludes this bill will do little, if anything, to provide relief.”</p>
<p><strong>The Senate majority leader, Harry Reid, Democrat of Nevada</strong>, said the highly partisan floor debate that opened Monday afternoon was one of the most significant in the history of the Senate. It is expected to continue for much of December, with supporters and opponents alike offering a raft of amendments as the White House and Democratic leaders seek to put together the 60-vote coalition necessary to win passage.</p>
<p>Administration officials continued to reach out to lawmakers in both parties to try to build support. <strong>Senator Susan Collins, Republican of Maine</strong>, said she met Monday for 45 minutes with Nancy-Ann DeParle, director of the White House Office of Health Reform, to discuss her concerns about the legislation.</p>
<p>In its report, the budget office compared estimates of premiums in 2016 under the new legislation and under current law. In either case, after seven years of inflation, premiums would be substantially higher than they are today.</p>
<p>The budget office said the analysis of premiums was extremely complex, so the experience of individuals and families &#8220;could vary significantly from the average.”</p>
<p>“In general,” it said, “the proposal would tend to increase premiums for people who are young and relatively healthy, and decrease premiums for those who are older and relatively unhealthy.”</p>
<p>Under the legislation, it said, the average premium per person in the individual insurance market would be 10 percent to 13 percent higher than under current law. But, it said, most people in this market — 18 million of the 32 million people buying insurance on their own — would qualify for federal subsidies, which would reduce their costs well below what they would have to pay under current law.</p>
<p>For people receiving subsidies, the budget office said, premiums would be 56 percent to 59 percent lower than under current law.</p>
<p>Without subsidies, it said, premiums under the bill would average $5,800 a year for individuals and $15,200 a year for families buying coverage on their own. Under current law, the comparable figures would be $5,500 and $13,100.</p>
<p>“This study indicates that, for most Americans, the bill will have a modestly positive impact on their premium costs,” Mr. Bayh said. “For the remainder, more will see their costs go down than up.”</p>
<p>Under the bill, the budget office said, individual policies would have to provide more benefits and pay a larger share of costs than most existing policies do. In other words, it said, some people would pay more, but would also get more.</p>
<p>Insurers, it said, would have to cover certain services that, in many cases, are not covered by existing policies in the individual insurance market. These include maternity care, prescription drugs, mental health services and substance abuse treatment. Moreover, it said, under the legislation, insurance would cover an average of 72 percent of medical costs for people buying insurance on their own, up from 60 percent under current law.</p>
<p>The budget office said it foresaw “smaller effects on premiums for employment-based coverage.”</p>
<p>In groups with 50 or fewer employees, it said, unsubsidized premiums in 2016 would average $7,800 a year for individuals and $19,200 for families — scarcely any different from the amounts expected under current law. Of the 25 million people receiving coverage from small businesses, it said, 3 million would qualify for subsidies, which would reduce their premiums by an average of 8 percent to 11 percent.</p>
<p>Large employers would generally not be eligible for such assistance. Their premiums in 2016 under the bill would average $7,300 for individual coverage and $20,100 for family coverage, the report said. Under current law, the comparable figures would be $7,400 for individual coverage and $20,300 for family coverage.</p>
<p>The Senate bill would impose an excise tax on high-premium health plans offered by employers. People who remain in such “Cadillac health plans” would pay higher premiums, but most people would avoid the effect of the tax by enrolling in plans with lower premiums, the budget office said.<br />
<strong><br />
Carl Hulse contributed reporting.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/12/01/blog-recovery-ce-week-13-no-big-cost-rise-in-u-s-premiums-is-seen-in-study-dec-1st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>BLOG RECOVERY CE Week #13:  &#8220;Promised change isn’t happening&#8221;  Nov. 29th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/29/ce-week-13-promised-change-isn%e2%80%99t-happening-nov-29th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/29/ce-week-13-promised-change-isn%e2%80%99t-happening-nov-29th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 29 Nov 2009 16:09:31 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1222</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The Spokesman-Review
As the Senate tackles the health care bill that may be its most important domestic legislation in a generation, you might have expected thousands of citizens to descend on Capitol Hill to demonstrate, for or against. But the streets outside – and even the Senate floor – aren’t where the action is. The important [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The Spokesman-Review</p>
<p>As the Senate tackles the health care bill that may be its most important domestic legislation in a generation, you might have expected thousands of citizens to descend on Capitol Hill to demonstrate, for or against. But the streets outside – and even the Senate floor – aren’t where the action is. The important parts of this debate have moved into the Senate’s back rooms. The great health care debate hasn’t been a triumph of mass politics on either side. Congress isn’t being stampeded by the public into passing a bill – and it’s not being stopped by the public from passing one either.</p>
<p>Instead, the debate has turned out to be a battle of old-fashioned special interests and parochialism. The most important players have been the insurance industry, the <strong>American Medical Association</strong>, labor unions and <strong>AARP</strong>, the senior-citizens lobby. As for parochialism, last week’s most blatant action may have been <strong>Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid</strong>’s insertion into the bill of a $100 million Medicaid bonus for Louisiana, whose senior senator, <strong>Mary Landrieu</strong>, has been one of the holdouts.</p>
<p>One reason for this resurgence of backroom politics is simple: <strong>Polls show the public to be fairly evenly divided on health care reform and understandably confused by its details</strong>. But there’s also a deeper reason. <strong>In modern American politics, with its professional lobbyists and millions of dollars in campaign advertising, public opinion isn’t always the most important thing.</strong></p>
<p><strong>For members of Congress who anticipate tough re-election campaigns, what’s most important is not what voters think of health care proposals today, but which interest groups will spend money in their states to shape voters’ perceptions next year.</strong> Groups on both sides, from the <strong>U.S. Chamber of Commerce</strong> to <strong>the unions</strong>, have already announced millions of dollars in planned advertising spending to do just that.</p>
<p>When he ran for president last year, Barack Obama said he’d try to change that system, in part by keeping his gigantic <strong>grass-roots network of campaign supporters</strong> together as a new, populist force in the legislative battles to come. But that’s not what happened. Members of Congress and their aides say the Obama organization, rechristened <strong>Organizing for America</strong>, or OFA, after the campaign, has had negligible effect on the debate.</p>
<p>For most of the year, the group was hobbled by the fact that Obama didn’t have a clear proposal for it to support, beyond a general commitment to (almost) <strong>universal health insurance</strong>. It did make sure that reform supporters turned out for town-hall meetings over the summer, and it’s running some ads attacking Republican House members in districts that Obama won.</p>
<p>But doing much beyond that has proved difficult, primarily because the most important debate over health care is not between the two parties – Republicans decided early that their goal was simply to stop a bill – but among Democrats. And OFA, now a wholly owned subsidiary of the <strong>Democratic National Committee</strong>, has carefully refrained from criticizing any Democratic incumbents. One of its biggest efforts this fall, instead, was organizing rallies and letter-writing campaigns to say “thank you” to House members who voted in favor of health care reform – lobbying with all the bite of a Hallmark greeting card.</p>
<p>OFA was also undercut by Obama’s own strategy for winning health care reform, which began by cutting deals with the most important interest groups – including, initially, the health insurance industry – not by mobilizing public pressure.</p>
<p>Obama’s choice of strategies may well turn out to have been good politics, especially on an issue as complex as health care. <strong>Well-funded, well-focused interest groups often wield power more effectively than the general public, even though the public has more at stake.</strong></p>
<p>That’s not a new phenomenon in American politics, but it’s one Obama told his followers he wanted to change. If the president wins a health care bill, it will be a major victory. But he will have won the old-fashioned way, not by reinventing American politics. It will be evidence that Obama, an untraditional candidate, has turned out to be a very traditional president.</p>
<p><strong>Doyle McManus is a Los Angeles Times columnist. He can be reached at doyle.mcmanus@latimes.com. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/29/ce-week-13-promised-change-isn%e2%80%99t-happening-nov-29th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #12:  &#8220;9/11 trials good for America&#8221;  Nov. 23rd</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-911-trials-good-for-america-nov-23rd/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-911-trials-good-for-america-nov-23rd/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 24 Nov 2009 05:42:36 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1218</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Leonard Pitts Jr.
The Spokesman-Review
“We (should) wrap him in bacon and deep fry him at a state fair while Lee Greenwood stabs him in the face.”
Jon Stewart of “The Daily Show” on confessed 9/11 mastermind Khalid Sheikh Mohammed
And seriously now, who doesn’t agree?
You’d have to be defective in your humanity not to. Mohammed plotted the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by Leonard Pitts Jr.<br />
The Spokesman-Review</strong></p>
<p>“We (should) wrap him in bacon and deep fry him at a state fair while Lee Greenwood stabs him in the face.”</p>
<p>Jon Stewart of “The Daily Show” on confessed <strong>9/11 mastermind Khalid Sheikh Mohammed</strong></p>
<p>And seriously now, who doesn’t agree?</p>
<p>You’d have to be defective in your humanity not to. Mohammed plotted the greatest act of mass murder in American history. Who among us wouldn’t like a piece of this guy?</p>
<p>Indeed, if critics of <strong>Attorney General Eric Holder</strong>’s decision to try him and his terrorist confederates in a New York City courtroom would be honest with themselves, they’d admit that this is what drives their condemnation, not questions of security, fears of acquittal or other obfuscatory concerns they’ve raised.</p>
<p>No, the baseline here is the understandable belief that these thugs, these gangsters of Islam, have no right to a trial, that the American legal system, with all its protections for the accused, all its rights and procedures and niceties, is more than they deserve.</p>
<p>Americans have always been ambivalent about the ability of our justice system to give bad people what they’ve got coming. That’s why the action movie almost always ends with the bad guy shot, impaled or fed into a wood chipper: Seeing him led away in handcuffs simply doesn’t impart the same visceral sense of just deserts.</p>
<p>But you have to wonder: Are our emotional needs the most important consideration here?</p>
<p>It’s worth remembering that even the architects of the greatest barbarism in history had their day in court. After burning away 11 million lives, the leaders of the Nazi regime found themselves facing not summary execution, but a trial before a military tribunal in Nuremberg, Germany.</p>
<p>As prosecutor Robert Jackson put it: “That four great nations, flushed with victory and stung with injury, stay the hand of vengeance and voluntarily submit their captive enemies to the judgment of the law is one of the most significant tributes that power has ever paid to reason.”</p>
<p>And when the trials were over and the verdicts delivered – death or imprisonment for most, three were acquitted – the New York Times editorialized as follows: “These sentences can neither atone for all the evil these men have brought into the world nor undo any part of it. But they help to assuage the conscience of mankind and to restore to honor the concept of the dignity of man which cannot be violated with impunity.”</p>
<p>Compare that with the Bush administration’s original, Supreme Court-rebuked vision of justice – minimal rights for the accused, torture allowed, the government’s thumb on justice’s scale – and maybe you’ll agree: we need this trial more than Mohammed does. For all its risks – and they are real – it offers a prize worth risking for: the promise of feeling like Americans again.</p>
<p>That feeling is arguably the most significant casualty of Sept. 11. On that day, we elevated a mob of stateless criminals, a mafia in cleric’s clothing, to the exalted level of rogue nation. But they were never that, never a threat to our national existence, lacked the forces to take even one square inch of American soil. What they could threaten – and take – was our sense of ourselves as a brave, reasonable and civilized people, inhabiting a nation of laws. They beckoned us into the mud with them, and we leapt.</p>
<p>It’s not the first time. Periodically, we have shed the burden of bravery, reason, civilization, laws. Always, it happens in moments of national stress, moments of overwhelming confusion, anger or fear, moments that make us prey to demons of expedience and moral compromise. Moments when we wonder if we can still afford to act like America.</p>
<p>But we face a band of bloodthirsty hoodlums whose dearest wish is to make us just like them. So maybe the better question is this:</p>
<p>Can we afford not to?</p>
<p><strong>Leonard Pitts Jr. is a columnist for the Miami Herald. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-911-trials-good-for-america-nov-23rd/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #12:  &#8220;Wave of Debt Payments Facing U.S. Government&#8221;  Nov. 23rd</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-wave-of-debt-payments-facing-u-s-government-nov-23rd/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-wave-of-debt-payments-facing-u-s-government-nov-23rd/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 23 Nov 2009 15:14:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Federalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Social Security]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1216</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[November 23, 2009
Payback Time
By EDMUND L. ANDREWS
WASHINGTON — The United States government is financing its more than trillion-dollar-a-year borrowing with i.o.u.’s on terms that seem too good to be true.
But that happy situation, aided by ultralow interest rates, may not last much longer.
Treasury officials now face a trifecta of headaches: a mountain of new debt, [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>November 23, 2009<br />
Payback Time<br />
By EDMUND L. ANDREWS</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — The United States government is financing its more than trillion-dollar-a-year borrowing with i.o.u.’s on terms that seem too good to be true.</p>
<p>But that happy situation, aided by ultralow interest rates, may not last much longer.</p>
<p>Treasury officials now face a trifecta of headaches: a mountain of new debt, a balloon of short-term borrowings that come due in the months ahead, and interest rates that are sure to climb back to normal as soon as <strong>the Federal Reserve</strong> decides that the emergency has passed.</p>
<p>Even as Treasury officials are racing to lock in today’s low rates by exchanging short-term borrowings for long-term bonds, the government faces a payment shock similar to those that sent legions of overstretched homeowners into default on their mortgages.</p>
<p>With the <strong>national debt now topping $12 trillion</strong>, the White House estimates that the government’s tab for servicing the debt will exceed $700 billion a year in 2019, up from $202 billion this year, even if annual budget deficits shrink drastically. Other forecasters say the figure could be much higher.</p>
<p>In concrete terms, an additional $500 billion a year in interest expense would total more than the combined federal budgets this year for education, energy, homeland security and the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.</p>
<p>The potential for rapidly escalating interest payouts is just one of the wrenching challenges facing the United States after decades of living beyond its means.</p>
<p>The surge in borrowing over the last year or two is widely judged to have been a necessary response to the financial crisis and the deep recession, and there is still a raging debate over how aggressively to bring down deficits over the next few years. But there is little doubt that the United States’ long-term budget crisis is becoming too big to postpone.</p>
<p>Americans now have to climb out of two deep holes: as debt-loaded consumers, whose personal wealth sank along with housing and stock prices; and as taxpayers, whose government debt has almost doubled in the last two years alone, just as costs tied to benefits for retiring baby boomers are set to explode.</p>
<p>The competing demands could deepen political battles over the size and role of the government, the trade-offs between taxes and spending, the choices between helping older generations versus younger ones, and the bottom-line questions about who should ultimately shoulder the burden.</p>
<p>“The government is on teaser rates,” said Robert Bixby, executive director of the Concord Coalition, a nonpartisan group that advocates lower deficits. “We’re taking out a huge mortgage right now, but we won’t feel the pain until later.”</p>
<p>So far, the demand for Treasury securities from investors and other governments around the world has remained strong enough to hold down the interest rates that the United States must offer to sell them. Indeed, the government paid less interest on its debt this year than in 2008, even though it added almost $2 trillion in debt.</p>
<p>The government’s average interest rate on new borrowing last year fell below 1 percent. For short-term i.o.u.’s like one-month Treasury bills, its average rate was only sixteen-hundredths of a percent.</p>
<p>“All of the auction results have been solid,” said Matthew Rutherford, the Treasury’s deputy assistant secretary in charge of finance operations. “Investor demand has been very broad, and it’s been increasing in the last couple of years.”</p>
<p>The problem, many analysts say, is that record government deficits have arrived just as the long-feared explosion begins in spending on benefits under Medicare and Social Security. The nation’s oldest baby boomers are approaching 65, setting off what experts have warned for years will be a fiscal nightmare for the government.</p>
<p>“What a good country or a good squirrel should be doing is stashing away nuts for the winter,” said William H. Gross, managing director of the Pimco Group, the giant bond-management firm. “The United States is not only not saving nuts, it’s eating the ones left over from the last winter.”</p>
<p>The current low rates on the country’s debt were caused by temporary factors that are already beginning to fade. One factor was the economic crisis itself, which caused panicked investors around the world to plow their money into the comparative safety of Treasury bills and notes. Even though the United States was the epicenter of the global crisis, investors viewed Treasury securities as the least dangerous place to park their money.</p>
<p>On top of that, the Fed used almost every tool in its arsenal to push interest rates down even further. It cut the overnight federal funds rate, the rate at which banks lend reserves to one another, to almost zero. And to reduce longer-term rates, it bought more than $1.5 trillion worth of Treasury bonds and government-guaranteed securities linked to mortgages.</p>
<p>Those conditions are already beginning to change. Global investors are shifting money into riskier investments like stocks and corporate bonds, and they have been pouring money into fast-growing countries like Brazil and China.</p>
<p>The Fed, meanwhile, is already halting its efforts at tamping down long-term interest rates. Fed officials ended their $300 billion program to buy up Treasury bonds last month, and they have announced plans to stop buying mortgage-backed securities by the end of next March.</p>
<p>Eventually, though probably not until at least mid-2010, the Fed will also start raising its benchmark interest rate back to more historically normal levels.</p>
<p>The United States will not be the only government competing to refinance huge debt. Japan, Germany, Britain and other industrialized countries have even higher government debt loads, measured as a share of their gross domestic product, and they too borrowed heavily to combat the financial crisis and economic downturn. As the global economy recovers and businesses raise capital to finance their growth, all that new government debt is likely to put more upward pressure on interest rates.</p>
<p>Even a small increase in interest rates has a big impact. An increase of one percentage point in the Treasury’s average cost of borrowing would cost American taxpayers an extra $80 billion this year — about equal to the combined budgets of the Department of Energy and the Department of Education.</p>
<p>But that could seem like a relatively modest pinch. Alan Levenson, chief economist at T. Rowe Price, estimated that the Treasury’s tab for debt service this year would have been $221 billion higher if it had faced the same interest rates as it did last year.</p>
<p>The White House estimates that the government will have to borrow about $3.5 trillion more over the next three years. On top of that, the Treasury has to refinance, or roll over, a huge amount of short-term debt that was issued during the financial crisis. Treasury officials estimate that about 36 percent of the government’s marketable debt — about $1.6 trillion — is coming due in the months ahead.</p>
<p>To lock in low interest rates in the years ahead, Treasury officials are trying to replace one-month and three-month bills with 10-year and 30-year Treasury securities. That strategy will save taxpayers money in the long run. But it pushes up costs drastically in the short run, because interest rates are higher for long-term debt.</p>
<p>Adding to the pressure, the Fed is set to begin reversing some of the policies it has been using to prop up the economy. Wall Street firms advising the Treasury recently estimated that the Fed’s purchases of Treasury bonds and mortgage-backed securities pushed down long-term interest rates by about one-half of a percentage point. Removing that support could in itself add $40 billion to the government’s annual tab for debt service.</p>
<p>This month, the Treasury Department’s private-sector advisory committee on debt management warned of the risks ahead.</p>
<p>“Inflation, higher interest rate and rollover risk should be the primary concerns,” declared the Treasury Borrowing Advisory Committee, a group of market experts that provide guidance to the government, on Nov. 4.</p>
<p>“Clever debt management strategy,” the group said, “can’t completely substitute for prudent fiscal policy.”</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/23/ce-week-12-wave-of-debt-payments-facing-u-s-government-nov-23rd/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #12:  &#8220;Senate Votes to Open Health Care Debate&#8221;  Nov. 22nd</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/22/ce-week-12-senate-votes-to-open-health-care-debate-nov-22nd/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/22/ce-week-12-senate-votes-to-open-health-care-debate-nov-22nd/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 22 Nov 2009 17:16:10 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1214</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[November 22, 2009
By DAVID M. HERSZENHORN and ROBERT PEAR
WASHINGTON — The Senate voted on Saturday to begin full debate on major health care legislation, propelling President Obama’s top domestic initiative over a crucial, preliminary hurdle in a formidable display of muscle-flexing by the Democratic majority.
“Tonight we have the opportunity, the historic opportunity to reform health [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>November 22, 2009<br />
By DAVID M. HERSZENHORN and ROBERT PEAR</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — The Senate voted on Saturday to begin full debate on major health care legislation, propelling President Obama’s top domestic initiative over a crucial, preliminary hurdle in a formidable display of muscle-flexing by the Democratic majority.</p>
<p>“Tonight we have the opportunity, the historic opportunity to reform health care once and for all,” said Senator Max Baucus, Democrat of Montana, and a chief architect of the legislation. “History is knocking on the door. Let’s open it. Let’s begin the debate.”</p>
<p>The 60-to-39 vote, along party lines, clears the way for weeks of rowdy floor proceedings that will begin after Thanksgiving and last through much of December.</p>
<p>The Senate bill seeks to extend health benefits to roughly 31 million Americans who are now uninsured, at a cost of $848 billion over 10 years.</p>
<p>The House earlier this month approved its health care bill by 220 to 215, with just one Republican voting in favor. That measure is broadly similar to the Senate legislation, but there are some major differences that would have to be resolved before a bill could reach Mr. Obama, and that would almost surely push the process into next year.</p>
<p>As the Democrats succeeded Saturday in uniting their caucus by winning over the last two holdouts, big disagreements remained, making final approval of the bill far from certain.</p>
<p>Two reluctant Democratic senators, Mary L. Landrieu of Louisiana and Blanche Lincoln of Arkansas, warned that their support for a motion to open debate did not guarantee that they would ultimately vote for the bill. Their remarks echoed previous comments by several other senators, including Ben Nelson, Democrat of Nebraska, and Joseph I. Lieberman, independent of Connecticut.</p>
<p>Those comments made clear that more horse-trading lies ahead and that major changes might be required if the bill is to be approved. And it suggested that the <strong>Senate majority leader, Harry Reid of Nevada</strong>, who relied only on members aligned with his party to bring the bill to the floor, may yet have to sway one or more Republicans to his side to get the bill adopted.</p>
<p><strong>The Senate Republican leader, Mitch McConnell of Kentucky</strong>, said his party’s opposition would persist. “The battle has just begun,” he said.</p>
<p>In a rare ceremonial gesture reserved for major votes, senators cast their yeas and nays from their desks in the chamber, each one rising to voice his or her position. Senator George V. Voinovich, Republican of Ohio, was not present and did not vote.</p>
<p>After the vote, Mr. Reid said he understood that Ms. Landrieu was already working with two other Democratic senators, Thomas R. Carper of Delaware and Charles E. Schumer of New York, to see if they could devise a public insurance plan with broad appeal.</p>
<p>The White House issued a statement praising the vote. “The President is gratified that the Senate has acted to begin consideration of health insurance reform legislation,” his press secretary, Robert Gibbs, said, adding that President Obama “looks forward to a thorough and productive debate.”</p>
<p>Mrs. Lincoln, who faces a tough re-election campaign next year and has in recent weeks been the target of millions of dollars in television advertising by both sides in the health care fight, said pointedly that she would not vote for the measure if it retained <strong>a government-run health insurance plan, known as the public option</strong>, to compete with private insurers. “Although I don’t agree with everything in this bill, I believe it is more important that we begin debate on how to improve the health care system for all Americans,” said Mrs. Lincoln, who was the last uncommitted Democrat, and whose speech, at about 2:30 p.m. Saturday, lifted a cloud of suspense that had hovered around the Capitol.</p>
<p>She added: “But let me be perfectly clear. I am opposed to a new government-administered health care plan as a part of comprehensive health insurance reform, and I will not vote in favor of the proposal that has been introduced by leader Reid as it is written.” But Senator Lieberman, who voted to take up the health care bill, said he was still staunchly opposed to a government-run plan. It is “a terrible idea,” he said.</p>
<p>Ms. Landrieu, whose support came after she won a provision that could be worth more than $100 million in additional federal aid for her financially troubled state, said, “I have decided there are enough significant reforms and safeguards in this bill to move forward, but much more work needs to be done.”</p>
<p>A parade of Democrats and Republicans spent Saturday laying out their arguments for and against the bill in floor speeches.</p>
<p>Mr. Reid, in a rousing closing speech given at his customary volume, which is barely audible, likened the health care bill to some of the most profound issues confronted by the Senate across history.</p>
<p>“Imagine if instead of debating either of the historic G.I. Bills — legislation that has given so many brave Americans the chance to brave college — if this body had stood silent,” Mr. Reid said. “Imagine if instead of debating the bills that created Social Security or Medicare, the Senate’s voices had been stilled. Imagine if instead of debating whether to abolish slavery, instead of debating whether giving women and minorities a right to vote, those who disagreed were muted, discussion was killed.”</p>
<p>With the Democrats nominally controlling 60 votes — the precise number needed to overcome the Republican attempt to stop the bill — the vote on Saturday evening was the biggest test yet of the Democrats’ resolve and of Mr. Reid’s ability to unite his fragile caucus. Mr. Reid faces a tough re-election fight next year.</p>
<p>The bill would expand health benefits by broadly expanding Medicaid, the federal-state insurance program for low-income people, and by providing subsidies to help moderate-income people buy either private insurance or coverage under a new government-run plan, the public option. And it would impose a requirement that nearly all Americans obtain insurance or pay monetary penalties for failing to do so.</p>
<p>According to the Congressional Budget Office, the cost of the legislation would be more than offset by new taxes and fees and reductions in government spending, so that the bill would reduce future federal budget deficits by $130 billion through 2019.</p>
<p>Mr. Reid accused Republicans who opposed the legislation of “living in a different world.” He and several other Democrats also used their speeches to assail perceived abuses by private insurers. “The health insurance industry has an insatiable appetite for more profit,” Mr. Reid said.</p>
<p>Senate Republicans countered with an impassioned denunciation of the measure as an ill-conceived budget-busting expansion of government and a threat to the health and economic security of all Americans, especially the elderly.</p>
<p>The Republicans sought to portray the vote on Saturday — on whether to end debate on a motion to bring up the health bill — as tantamount to a vote on the bill itself, and to shake the confidence of Democrats who had wavered in recent days.</p>
<p>In his closing argument, just ahead of the vote, Mr. McConnell implored at least a single Democrat to vote no. “If we don’t stop this bill tonight,” he said, “the only debate we’ll be having is about higher premiums, not savings for the American people, higher taxes instead of lower costs, and cuts to Medicare rather than improving seniors’ care.”</p>
<p>“The American people are looking at the Senate tonight; they’re hoping we say no to this bill,” Mr. McConnell added moments later, holding up a single index finger. “All it would take,” he said, “is just one member of the other side of the aisle, just one, to give us an opportunity not to end the debate but to change the debate in the direction the American people would like us to go.”</p>
<p>Mr. McConnell warned of the political consequences for senators who voted to move ahead. “Senators who support this bill have a lot of explaining to do,” he said. “Americans know that a vote to proceed on this bill, to get on this bill, is a vote for higher premiums, higher taxes and massive cuts to Medicare.”</p>
<p>Republicans also said that the vote was a proxy for a larger dispute over abortion, because they said the bill did not sufficiently restrict the use of federal money for insurance covering abortions. Senator Mike Johanns, Republican of Nebraska, described the vote as “the key vote on abortion in the health care debate.”</p>
<p>Saturday night’s vote was required because Senate rules and precedent have long granted a right of virtually unlimited debate, or filibuster, to the minority that can be curtailed only by a supermajority vote of 60 senators to move ahead. Currently, there are 58 Democrats in the Senate and two independents who routinely align with them. If the Democrats had lost the vote, they could have tried again, presumably after changing the bill to try to attract more votes.</p>
<p>Senator Patrick J. Leahy, Democrat of Vermont assailed the Republicans as obstructionists on Saturday morning. “I will vote today to end the filibuster so the Senate can begin the historic debate to improve and reform our nation’s health insurance system,” he said. “Let’s not duck the debate, let the debate begin. Let’s not hide from the votes.”</p>
<p>While Democrats generally agree on the broad goals of the legislation, to cover the uninsured and to slow the growth in health care spending, there are potentially serious disagreements over any number of provisions that could sink the bill.</p>
<p>Ms. Landrieu, in her speech, methodically cataloged provisions of the bill that she liked and those that she said needed improvement.</p>
<p>Under the bill, she said, owners of small businesses would no longer face “volatile costs” for health insurance. In addition, she said, the bill would “encourage employers to move away from high-cost benefit plans” and shift some compensation to wages.</p>
<p>But more needed to be done to improve the bill, she argued, particularly to help small businesses and the self-employed. And she issued a stern warning about the public option, one of the most contentious features of the sweeping health care legislation.<br />
<strong><br />
Carl Hulse contributed reporting.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/22/ce-week-12-senate-votes-to-open-health-care-debate-nov-22nd/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8221; News media needs balance, more debate&#8221;  Nov. 18th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-news-media-needs-balance-more-debate-nov-18th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-news-media-needs-balance-more-debate-nov-18th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 18 Nov 2009 17:56:20 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Media]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1210</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By Chris Jordan
November 18, 2009
As a liberal, and an avid news consumer, there is no cable news channel that warms my heart more than MSNBC.
Why do I find MSNBC so appealing? The network made a business decision in recent years that it was good for ratings to move to the political left. With a few [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By Chris Jordan<br />
November 18, 2009</strong></p>
<p>As a <strong>liberal</strong>, and an avid news consumer, there is no cable news channel that warms my heart more than MSNBC.</p>
<p>Why do I find MSNBC so appealing? The network made a business decision in recent years that it was good for ratings to move to the political left. With a few exceptions, <strong>strong liberal commentators like Keith Olbermann, Rachel Maddow, Ed Schultz, and Chris Matthews have become the face of MSNBC</strong>.</p>
<p>The same trend is taking place on the opposite side of the cable divide. We’ve known for years that Fox News’ “Fair and Balanced” act was a charade, but since Obama’s election, they’ve taken it to a whole new level.</p>
<p>Fox was instrumental in relentlessly promoting the <strong>right-wing “tea parties,”</strong> even going so far as to inform its viewers of their times and locations. Former Republican presidential candidate <strong>Mike Huckabee</strong> has been given his own talk show. <strong>Glenn Beck</strong> has also joined Fox and has seen his ratings skyrocket after labeling the president a racist.</p>
<p>While Fox and MSNBC have shifted further away from the center, CNN has largely stuck to simply covering the news.</p>
<p>Anchors <strong>Larry King, Wolf Blitzer, and Anderson Cooper</strong> rarely promote a politically slanted agenda on their shows. What’s been their reward? Declining ratings.</p>
<p>The trend toward more partisan news is clear. Cable stations are transitioning to more and more commentary, less and less hard news.</p>
<p>I’m not trying to argue that opinions are bad. Heck, I’d be out of a job if we didn’t have opinions in the media. But this trend seems to indicate that news stations are increasingly going to have to “pick sides” or suffer lower ratings, and citizens are getting more news from one-sided sources.</p>
<p>Simultaneously, high-profile stories of late have demonstrated the mainstream media’s obsession with the political angle over substantive discussion and debate.</p>
<p>A perfect example is coverage of the health care issue. Until several weeks ago, the phrase, “the public option is dead” was spouted on cable news, oh, about 10,231 times, by my count. We’ve seen endless stories about the “fate” of this proposal, but it’s hard to remember if there was even a serious and thorough discussion of its merits.</p>
<p><strong>While partisan news sources are on the rise, we are seeing less and less debate of key issues</strong>. News channels obsess over the politics of health care — Will it pass? Are there enough votes? Obama’s approval rating is down! — without paying much attention to the actual components of reform.</p>
<p>It’s no wonder then, that less than half of Americans, 47 percent, say they are very or somewhat familiar with the details of the health-care legislation, according to a recent Washington Post survey. While Congress is on the verge of passing the most important reform in decades, most people don’t even know what is in the bill.</p>
<p>Thanks a lot, news media.</p>
<p>As we strive to be informed citizens, it is important that we make extra effort to get a range of perspectives instead of merely “picking a team.” One-sided news is becoming increasingly prevalent. So next time you’re watching MSNBC, consider switching over to Fox during the commercial break (I know it’s painful) just to see what they’re saying, or seek out conservative opinions elsewhere. The same idea applies if Fox News is the channel that warms your heart: Seek out other views.</p>
<p>As far as a robust debate in the news media goes, we can only hope that the recent trend reverses itself and consumers start to reward those programs that go truly in depth on the issues.</p>
<p><strong>Reach columnist Chris Jordan at opinion@dailyuw.com.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-news-media-needs-balance-more-debate-nov-18th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>21</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8220;China Holds Firm on Major Issues in Obama’s Visit&#8221;  Nov. 18th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-china-holds-firm-on-major-issues-in-obama%e2%80%99s-visit-nov-18th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-china-holds-firm-on-major-issues-in-obama%e2%80%99s-visit-nov-18th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 18 Nov 2009 17:43:53 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Environment]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1204</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[November 18, 2009
By HELENE COOPER
BEIJING — In six hours of meetings, at two dinners and during a stilted 30-minute news conference in which President Hu Jintao did not allow questions, President Obama was confronted, on his first visit, with a fast-rising China more willing to say no to the United States.
On topics like Iran (Mr. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>November 18, 2009<br />
By HELENE COOPER</strong></p>
<p>BEIJING — In six hours of meetings, at two dinners and during a stilted 30-minute news conference in which <strong>President Hu Jintao</strong> did not allow questions, President Obama was confronted, on his first visit, with a fast-rising China more willing to say no to the United States.</p>
<p>On topics like Iran (Mr. Hu did not publicly discuss the possibility of sanctions), China’s currency (he made no nod toward changing its value) and human rights (a joint statement bluntly acknowledged that the two countries “have differences”), China held firm against most American demands.</p>
<p>With China’s micro-management of Mr. Obama’s appearances in the country, the trip did more to showcase China’s ability to push back against outside pressure than it did to advance the main issues on Mr. Obama’s agenda, analysts said.</p>
<p>“China effectively stage-managed President Obama’s public appearances, got him to make statements endorsing Chinese positions of political importance to them and effectively squelched discussions of contentious issues such as human rights and China’s currency policy,” said Eswar S. Prasad, a China specialist at Cornell University. “In a masterstroke, they shifted the public discussion from the global risks posed by Chinese currency policy to the dangers of loose monetary policy and protectionist tendencies in the U.S.”</p>
<p>White House officials maintained they got what they came for — the beginning of a needed give-and-take with a surging economic giant. With a civilization as ancient as China’s, they argued, it would be counterproductive — and reminiscent of President George W. Bush’s style — for Mr. Obama to confront Beijing with loud chest-beating that might alienate the Chinese. Mr. Obama, the officials insisted, had made his points during private meetings and one-on-one sessions.</p>
<p>“I do not expect, and I can speak authoritatively for the president on this, that we thought the waters would part and everything would change over the course of our almost two-and-a-half-day trip to China,” said Robert Gibbs, the White House spokesman. “We understand there’s a lot of work to do and that we’ll continue to work hard at making more progress.”</p>
<p>Several China experts noted that Mr. Obama was not leaving Beijing empty-handed. The two countries put out a five-point joint statement pledging to work together on a variety of issues. The statement calls for regular exchanges between Mr. Obama and Mr. Hu, and asks that each side pay more attention to the strategic concerns of the other. The statement also pledges that they will work as partners on economic issues, Iran and climate change.</p>
<p>But despite a conciliatory tone that began weeks ago when Mr. Obama declined to meet the Tibetan spiritual leader, the Dalai Lama, before visiting China to avoid offending China’s leaders, it remains unclear whether Mr. Obama made progress on the most pressing policy matters on the American agenda in China or elsewhere in Asia.</p>
<p>The president has had to fend off criticism from American conservatives that he appeared to soften the American stance on the positioning of troops on the Japanese island of Okinawa, and for bowing to Japan’s emperor.</p>
<p>At a regional conference in Singapore, Mr. Obama announced a setback on another top foreign policy priority, <strong>climate change</strong>, acknowledging that comprehensive agreement to fight global warming was no longer within reach this year.</p>
<p>Past American presidents have usually insisted in advance on some concrete achievements from their trips overseas. President Bush received vigorous endorsements of his top foreign policy priority, the global war on terrorism, during his visits to Beijing, and President Bill Clinton guided China toward joining the <strong>World Trade Organization</strong> after prolonged negotiations. When either of those presidents visited the country, China often made a modest concession on human rights as well.</p>
<p>This time, Mr. Hu declined to follow the lead of <strong>President Dmitri A. Medvedev of Russia</strong>, who, after months of massaging by the Obama administration, now says that he is open to tougher sanctions against Iran if negotiations fail to curb Iran’s nuclear program. The administration needs China’s support if tougher sanctions are to be approved by the <strong>United Nations Security Council</strong>. But during the joint appearance in Beijing on Tuesday, Mr. Hu made no mention of sanctions.</p>
<p>Rather, he said, it was “very important” to “appropriately resolve the Iranian nuclear regime through dialogue and negotiations.” And then, as if to drive home that point, Mr. Hu added, “During the talks, I underlined to President Obama that given our differences in national conditions, it is only normal that our two sides may disagree on some issues.”</p>
<p>White House officials acknowledged that they did not get what they wanted from Mr. Hu on Iran but said that Mr. Obama’s method would yield more in the long term. “We’re not looking for them to lead or change course, we’re looking for them to not be obstructionist,” one administration official said.</p>
<p>In a meeting in Beijing with a senior Chinese official on Wednesday morning, <strong>Secretary of State Hillary Rodham Clinton</strong> again pressed China on Iran. She told the official, Dai Bingguo, that even if China had not decided what sanctions on Iran it would accept, “you need to send a signal,” said a senior American official, who spoke on condition of anonymity so he could describe the exchange.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama did not appear to move the Chinese on currency issues, either. China has come under heavy pressure, not only from the United States but also from Europe and several Asian countries, to revise its policy of keeping its currency, the renminbi, pegged at an artificially low value against the dollar to help promote its exports. Some economists say China must take that step to prevent the return of large trade and financial imbalances that may have contributed to the recent financial crisis.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama on Tuesday could only cite China’s “past statements” in support of shifting toward market-oriented exchange rates, implying that he had not extracted a fresh commitment from Beijing to move in that direction soon.</p>
<p>There are many reasons the White House may have heeded China’s clear desire for a visit free of the polemics that often accompany meetings between leaders of the two countries. Mr. Obama’s foreign policy is rooted in recasting the United States as a thoughtful listener to friends and rivals alike. “No we haven’t made China a democracy in three days — maybe if we pounded our chest a lot that would work,” Mr. Gibbs said in an e-mail message on Tuesday night. “But it hasn’t in the last 16 years.”</p>
<p>Kenneth Lieberthal, a Brookings Institution scholar who oversaw China issues in President Clinton’s White House, agreed. “The United States actually has enormous influence on popular thinking in China, but it is primarily by example,” he said. “If you go to the next step and say, ‘You guys ought to be like us,’ you lose the impact of who you are.”</p>
<p>The National Security Council’s spokesman, Michael A. Hammer, added, “What we did come to do is speak bluntly about the issues which are important to us, not in an unnecessarily offensive manner, but rather in the Obama style of showing respect.”</p>
<p>Mr. Obama, even as he projected a softer image, did nudge the Chinese on some delicate issues.</p>
<p>On Tuesday, standing next to Mr. Hu, Mr. Obama brought up Tibet, where Beijing-backed authorities have clamped down on religious freedom. “While we recognize that Tibet is part of the People’s Republic of China, the United States supports the early resumption of dialogue between the Chinese government and representatives of the Dalai Lama to resolve any concerns and differences that the two sides may have,” he said.</p>
<p><strong>Reporting was contributed by Sharon LaFraniere, Edward Wong, Michael Wines and Mark Landler.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-china-holds-firm-on-major-issues-in-obama%e2%80%99s-visit-nov-18th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8220;A centrist in health-care debate, Lincoln hears it from all sides&#8221;  Nov. 17th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-a-centrist-in-health-care-debate-lincoln-hears-it-from-all-sides-nov-17th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-a-centrist-in-health-care-debate-lincoln-hears-it-from-all-sides-nov-17th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 18 Nov 2009 17:12:08 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1202</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
GOP and liberals put pressure on Democrat as Senate vote nears
By Shailagh Murray
Washington Post Staff Writer
Tuesday, November 17, 2009
When the Senate begins floor debate on a health-care reform package this week, the outcome is almost certain to rest on decisions made by a handful of moderate Democrats.
None of those Democrats is feeling the heat as [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><br />
GOP and liberals put pressure on Democrat as Senate vote nears</p>
<p>By Shailagh Murray<br />
Washington Post Staff Writer<br />
Tuesday, November 17, 2009</strong></p>
<p>When the Senate begins floor debate on a health-care reform package this week, the outcome is almost certain to rest on decisions made by a handful of moderate Democrats.</p>
<p>None of those Democrats is feeling the heat as intensely as <strong>Sen. Blanche Lincoln (Ark.)</strong>, who has become emblematic of the improbable distance that health-care reform has traveled, and how far it still must go before becoming law.</p>
<p>Her vote and that of two other Democrats expressing serious reservations about the legislation &#8212; <strong>Sens. Ben Nelson (Neb.) and Mary Landrieu (La.)</strong> &#8212; will determine whether it will garner the 60 needed to break an all-but-certain Republican <strong>filibuster</strong>.</p>
<p>There are 60 members of the <strong>Democratic caucus</strong> but one, <strong>independent Sen. Joseph I. Lieberman (Conn.)</strong>, has threatened to join a GOP filibuster if the final bill contains <strong>a government insurance plan, or &#8220;public option.&#8221;</strong> With only a single Republican, <strong>Sen. Olympia J. Snowe of Maine</strong>, even considering backing the final product on the floor, the trio of Democratic centrists could make or break the reform effort.</p>
<p>And of those three, only Lincoln must face voters next year.</p>
<p>Hundreds of thousands of Lincoln&#8217;s constituents are low-income and lack insurance, the very kind of voters expected to benefit under the Senate bill. Lincoln, a second-term senator, helped write some of the legislation&#8217;s key provisions as a member of <strong>the Finance Committee</strong>, and her sometimes uncomfortable role near the center of the debate could cost her in culturally conservative Arkansas. Despite the potential benefits for many in her state, polls show her support weakening, and constituents are expressing doubts about the proposed overhaul.</p>
<p>The low-profile centrist is being pressed by both sides. Democratic activists are incensed that she has turned against the public option, an idea she once supported. Republicans are casting her cautious approach to the health-care debate in starkly political terms, saying that she is unwilling to put local interests above those of a president who lost the state by a resounding 20 percentage points.</p>
<p>&#8220;I want to be a check and balance on Barack Obama&#8217;s extreme agenda,&#8221; state Sen. Gilbert Baker, a front-runner for the GOP nomination, told reporters last week.</p>
<p>An Arkansas Poll published Nov. 5 found that Lincoln&#8217;s job-approval rating had dropped to 43 percent, from 54 percent a year ago. At least seven Republicans are vying to challenge her bid for a third term; Baker raised $500,000 in his first month as a candidate. And if she does not embrace the party line on the health issue, Lincoln could also face a <strong>Democratic primary challenger, along with a Green Party opponent in the general election</strong>.</p>
<p>&#8220;In some ways, there&#8217;s not a good vote on this,&#8221; said Sen. Mark Pryor (D), Arkansas&#8217;s junior senator, who coasted to reelection last year. &#8220;You&#8217;re going to have detractors on either side, no matter what you do. So I think in the end you have to what you think is right. And I think that&#8217;s what we&#8217;re all going to have to do.&#8221;</p>
<p>The first test for Lincoln could come as early as Friday, when the Senate will vote on whether to bring the bill to the floor. Lincoln told party leaders she would study the final product before committing either way.</p>
<p>&#8220;What people want is for us to take our time and not rush into something that we haven&#8217;t thought completely through,&#8221; she said, shrugging off the pressure as she hurried back to her office after a Senate vote last week.</p>
<p>Although Pryor supports the reform effort, another prominent Arkansan, Rep. Mike Ross (D), voted against the House bill.</p>
<p>&#8220;Most people support the need for health-insurance reform; they just think we can do it for less,&#8221; Ross said. &#8220;They really, as I do, support more choices. They&#8217;re just skeptical of a bill that takes 2,000 pages to accomplish that.&#8221;</p>
<p>Ross was reluctant to offer Lincoln advice, but acknowledged her predicament. &#8220;She represents the whole state. I just represent one-fourth of the state. I&#8217;d just be guessing.&#8221; But he added: &#8220;I think people fear the unintended consequences in a bill this massive.&#8221;</p>
<p>Democratic leaders expect Lincoln to stick with them on key procedural votes, but are less confident about winning her support on critical amendments &#8212; particularly on the contentious public option.</p>
<p>Lincoln&#8217;s record on a government insurance plan has drawn detractors on both sides. In July, she wrote in the Arkansas Democrat-Gazette: &#8220;Individuals should be able to choose from a range of quality health insurance plans. Options should include private plans as well as a quality, affordable public plan or non-profit plan that can accomplish the same goals as those of a public plan.&#8221;</p>
<p>By Sept. 1, she had changed her mind. &#8220;I would not support a solely government-funded public option,&#8221; Lincoln said at an event in Little Rock. &#8220;We can&#8217;t afford that.&#8221;</p>
<p>In recent weeks, she also has raised concerns about both potential compromise approaches &#8212; one that would allow states to &#8220;opt out&#8221; of a public plan that <strong>Senate Majority Leader Harry M. Reid (D-Nev.)</strong> is expected to include in the Senate bill, and a proposal by Snowe, the only Republican still at the negotiating table, to create a public option as a fallback if private insurers do not offer reasonable rates.</p>
<p>In the process, Lincoln has riled liberal groups including <strong>MoveOn.org</strong>, which is targeting her with radio ads, <strong>direct mail</strong> and rallies outside two of her Arkansas offices. Perhaps more ominously, MoveOn &#8212; working with the liberal group Democracy for America &#8212; has amassed $3.5 million in pledges to fund primary challenges against any Democratic senator who sides with Republicans to block an up-or-down vote on a bill with a public option.</p>
<p>&#8220;We think it&#8217;s really important for her to see there are negative political consequences to being on the wrong side of this issue,&#8221; said Ilyse Hogue, MoveOn&#8217;s campaign director. &#8220;There&#8217;s no arguing she&#8217;s in a conservative state, but she&#8217;s going to face a tough election no matter what, and she can&#8217;t do it without the base. These are the activists, the people who knock on doors, and she is really running the risk of alienating them.&#8221;</p>
<p><strong>The National Republican Senatorial Committee</strong> is also documenting each of Lincoln&#8217;s comments on health care to build a case against her. The Republican National Committee released a Web video this week that compares her public-option remarks to <strong>Sen. John F. Kerry&#8217;s &#8220;I actually voted for it before I voted against it&#8221; line about Iraq war funding</strong>.</p>
<p>For GOP leaders, the best strategy for defeating the Senate bill is to sow doubts among vulnerable Democrats, convincing them that Reid is leading them off a political cliff.</p>
<p>&#8220;There&#8217;s a great effort under way here to convince their members to ignore public opinion&#8221; on health-care reform, <strong>Minority Leader Mitch McConnell (R-Ky.)</strong> told reporters last week. &#8220;I hope it will not be lost on our Democratic friends where the public is, how the public feels about this measure. They&#8217;re speaking increasingly loudly that they do not think it ought to pass.&#8221;</p>
<p>Recent polls suggest that reform is a difficult sell in Lincoln&#8217;s home state. The Arkansas Poll, conducted in mid-October by the University of Arkansas&#8217;s Survey Research Center, found that 39 percent of voters support a public option and 48 percent oppose the idea. And respondents split about evenly on the question of whether reform would improve or hurt their quality of care.</p>
<p>&#8220;It&#8217;s hard to draw firm conclusions,&#8221; said Arkansas Poll Director Janine Parry. &#8220;People are dissatisfied, but they haven&#8217;t signed on with an alternative.&#8221; Lincoln, said Parry, appears to be &#8220;right with her constituents &#8212; convinced that we need to do something, and not convinced it&#8217;s this.&#8221;</p>
<p>Senior Senate aides said Lincoln helped to shape measures aimed at reducing the cost of such procedures as MRIs and at better coordinating care among doctors, hospitals and nursing homes. And she was the primary sponsor, along with Snowe, of a provision aimed at giving small businesses more health-care choices for employees.</p>
<p>According to the Kaiser Family Foundation, of the nearly 473,000 Arkansas residents who lacked coverage as of 2008, virtually all would be eligible for federal assistance under the Senate bill &#8212; either through <strong>Medicaid</strong> or through tax credits that would subsidize the purchase of private plans.</p>
<p>&#8220;There&#8217;s a lot in the bill that will be good for Arkansas,&#8221; Pryor said. &#8220;But there are a lot of people in our state who are against this bill. Some have very legitimate concerns and ask very good questions. But also some is based on bad information. We have to try to talk to those people.&#8221;</p>
<p>If Lincoln supports the Senate bill, she will have to sell it to constituents before they see many of the legislation&#8217;s benefits. But she says she is well aware of the challenge. &#8220;I have no doubt that I&#8217;ll be held accountable on this,&#8221; she said. &#8220;We&#8217;re going to be held accountable on a lot of things.&#8221; </p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-a-centrist-in-health-care-debate-lincoln-hears-it-from-all-sides-nov-17th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8220;Deep divisions linger on health care&#8221;  Nov. 17th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-deep-divisions-linger-on-health-care-nov-17th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-deep-divisions-linger-on-health-care-nov-17th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 18 Nov 2009 17:05:20 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Media]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1200</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[But poll finds support for key provisions of reform effort
By Dan Balz and Jon Cohen
Washington Post Staff Writers
Tuesday, November 17, 2009
As the Senate prepares to take up legislation aimed at overhauling the nation&#8217;s health-care system, President Obama and the Democrats are still struggling to win the battle for public opinion. A new Washington Post-ABC News [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>But poll finds support for key provisions of reform effort</p>
<p>By Dan Balz and Jon Cohen<br />
Washington Post Staff Writers<br />
Tuesday, November 17, 2009</strong></p>
<p>As the Senate prepares to take up legislation aimed at overhauling the nation&#8217;s health-care system, President Obama and the Democrats are still struggling to win the battle for public opinion. A new Washington Post-ABC News poll shows Americans deeply divided over the proposals under consideration and majorities predicting higher costs ahead.</p>
<p>But Republican opponents have done little better in rallying the <strong>public opposition</strong> to kill the reform effort. Americans continue to support key elements of the legislation, including a mandate that employers provide health insurance to their workers and access to a government-sponsored insurance plan for those people without insurance.</p>
<p>Over the past few months, public opinion has solidified, leaving Obama and the Democrats with the political challenge of enacting one of the most ambitious pieces of domestic legislation in decades in the face of a nation split over the wisdom of doing so. <strong>In the new poll, 48 percent say they support the proposed changes; 49 percent are opposed.<br />
</strong><br />
With the bill through the House, Senate Democrats are now looking for the votes to enact their version of the legislation and keep the reform effort moving forward. Whatever the outcome of the health-care debate, it will have a powerful influence in shaping the political climate for <strong>next year&#8217;s midterm elections</strong>.</p>
<p>The House bill contains a highly controversial provision prohibiting abortion coverage for those insured under a new public insurance plan as well as those who received federal subsidies to purchase private insurance. <strong>In the poll, 61 percent say they support barring coverage for abortions for those receiving public subsidies, but if private funds were used to pay for abortion expenses, the numbers flipped.</strong> With segregated private money used to cover abortion procedures, 56 percent say insurance offered to those using government assistance should be able to include such coverage.</p>
<p>The new poll provides ammunition for both advocates and opponents of reform. For opponents, a clear area of public concern centers on cost &#8212; 52 percent say an altered system would probably make their own care more expensive, and 56 percent see the overall cost of health care in the country going up as a result.</p>
<p>Few see clear benefits in exchange for higher expenses. Rather, there has been a small but significant increase in the number (now 37 percent) who anticipate their care deteriorating under a revamped system, putting that number in line with opinion in July 1994, just before President Bill Clinton&#8217;s health-care reform efforts fizzled.</p>
<p>Among those with insurance, three times as many continue to see worse rather than better coverage options ahead (39 to 13 percent), and fewer than half of those who lack insurance see better options under a changed system. Six in 10 see it as &#8220;very&#8221; or &#8220;somewhat&#8221; likely that many private insurers would be forced out of business by a government-sponsored insurance plan, a potential result that GOP leaders frequently warn about.</p>
<p>But reform proponents have other findings to bolster their case. Two-thirds of those surveyed support one of the basic tenets of the reform plan, a new requirement that all employers with payrolls of $500,000 or more provide health insurance coverage for their employees or face fines.</p>
<p>As in previous polls, a majority supports a government-sponsored heath insurance plan to compete with private insurers, although the percentage supporting the general idea has slipped slightly over the past month to 53 percent. Support for the scheme jumps to 72 percent when the public plan is limited to those who lack access to coverage through an employer or the <strong>Medicare</strong> or <strong>Medicaid</strong> systems.</p>
<p>While Americans overall are divided on reform legislation, the Democrats have made some progress among at least one key group. Support among senior citizens, while still broadly negative, is up 13 points since September to 44 percent.</p>
<p>Seniors have also tilted back toward Obama when matched head to head with congressional Republicans on dealing with health-care reform, helping the president to a 13-point advantage over the GOP on this issue.</p>
<p>Republicans appear to be hampered by a widespread perception that they have not offered clear choices: 61 percent of those polled say the GOP is &#8220;mainly criticizing&#8221; without presenting alternatives to Democratic proposals.</p>
<p>Looking toward <strong>next year&#8217;s midterm elections</strong>, 25 percent say they more apt to back a candidate who supports the proposed health-care changes; 29 percent are less likely to do so. More, 45 percent, say the vote will not make much of a difference. <strong>Independents</strong> are nearly twice as likely to be swayed away from rather than toward a candidate who supports the changes (31 percent to 17 percent).</p>
<p>Beyond health care, <strong>Obama</strong> continues to garner broadly positive ratings from the public. His <strong>overall approval rating stands at 56 percent</strong>, holding steady in Post-ABC polls since the late summer. More, 61 percent, say they have an overall favorable impression of him, and a slim majority continues to see him as &#8220;about right&#8221; ideologically (four in 10 consider him &#8220;too liberal.&#8221;</p>
<p>The president, who is on a 10-day visit to Asia, gets his top mark on handling international affairs, and also picks up majority approval on dealing with the threat of terrorism. But Americans are more divided over his performance on other key issues, with nearly even splits in satisfaction with his work on health care, the economy and the situation in Afghanistan. On each of these three issues, intensity runs against the president, with significantly higher numbers expressing &#8220;strong&#8221; disapproval as strident approval. Obama receives generally negative reviews on his handling of the <strong>federal budget deficit</strong>, with 53 percent disapproving of his actions on that front.</p>
<p>Obama continues to be lifted by weakness in the opposition. In addition to his double-digit lead over congressional Republicans on health care, the president has a 15-point advantage on handling the nation&#8217;s still-struggling economy. More broadly, Democrats continue to have the edge as the party more trusted to deal with the country&#8217;s main problems over the next few years and when it comes to being more empathetic and more in tune with people&#8217;s values.</p>
<p>But there are also evident signs of an <strong>anti-incumbent mood</strong> in the new survey, which would disproportionately hurt the majority Democrats next fall should they hold. Most see the country as headed pretty seriously off on the wrong track and half of all Americans say they are inclined to look around for someone new to support for Congress; just 38 percent are inclined to reelect their member of Congress. These numbers are similar to those from November 1993, one year before Republicans took back control of the House and Senate and close to those from May 2006, six months before Democrats re-captured the Congress.</p>
<p>Among <strong>independents</strong>, nearly two-thirds say they are inclined to seek new representatives. Independents also about evenly divided over which party better represents their personal values and give Democrats a narrow advantage on being more in tune with &#8220;needs of people like you.&#8221; More than a quarter of independents do not trust either party to adequately deal with the country&#8217;s primary concerns in the coming years.</p>
<p><strong>The poll was conducted Nov. 12-15 by conventional and cellular telephone among a random national sample of 1,001 adults. The margin of sampling error is plus or minus three percentage points.<br />
</strong><br />
<strong>Polling analyst Jennifer Agiesta contributed to this report. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/18/ce-week-11-deep-divisions-linger-on-health-care-nov-17th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8220;What Coattails?&#8221;  Nov. 16th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-what-coattails-nov-16th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-what-coattails-nov-16th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 16 Nov 2009 17:46:27 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1191</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Why right-of-center candidates are succeeding in the age of Obama.
By Yuval Levin &#124; NEWSWEEK
Published Nov 7, 2009
From the magazine issue dated Nov 16, 2009
All year, leading Democrats from the president on down have argued that the Republican Party is in the midst of a catastrophic civil war. You know the story. Successive election defeats have [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Why right-of-center candidates are succeeding in the age of Obama.</p>
<p>By Yuval Levin | NEWSWEEK<br />
Published Nov 7, 2009<br />
From the magazine issue dated Nov 16, 2009</strong></p>
<p>All year, leading Democrats from the president on down have argued that the Republican Party is in the midst of a catastrophic civil war. You know the story. Successive election defeats have narrowed the GOP&#8217;s ideological range, and now an open struggle is afoot for control of its voice and agenda. Rush Limbaugh and Sarah Palin, it seems, are out to destroy Republican moderates and commit the party to a radical course sure to relegate it to irrelevance. Only a move to the left can save the Republicans.</p>
<p>And, in fact, the new president and Congress had a real opportunity to divide the Republican Party. A moderate stimulus bill that offered a short-term boost and included a meaningful tax-cut component, for instance, might have won a very significant number of Republican votes in Congress last winter and launched a damaging internal GOP battle over the proper role of the opposition. Some restraint on taxes and spending in general, and on health care and energy policy in particular, would also have divided congressional Republicans and left the direction of the party in doubt.</p>
<p>But Washington Democrats chose a different route. While they have been peddling the story of Republican self-immolation, they have actually been creating the conditions for a Republican resurgence. <strong>President Obama, Speaker Pelosi, and Majority Leader Reid</strong> have launched the country on a course of massive spending, a dramatic expansion of government, and a slew of new taxes in the midst of a recession. Finding themselves in control of Congress and the White House and so possessed of an unusual opportunity to pursue their ideological agenda, they have sought to make the most of it. But they have misjudged just how far to the left of the country as a whole the Democratic base now resides—and so, rather than strengthen their own brand, they have inadvertently done wonders to build and unify the Republican Party.</p>
<p>In Congress, Republicans now march nearly as one, to a degree not seen in 15 years. Rather than split on the stimulus, <strong>conservative and moderate Republicans</strong> easily agreed that it went much too far to the left. The bill received zero Republican votes in the House and just three in the Senate. On many crucial votes since, and in the ongoing health-care and <strong>cap-and-trade</strong> debates, Republicans have stood together almost unanimously.</p>
<p>Around the country, the party seems to be regaining its balance. Last Tuesday&#8217;s election results were an extraordinary boost for Republicans. They showed that it is not necessary to run away from the party&#8217;s conservative brand to win elections. On the contrary, Republicans running as Republicans seem to succeed in the age of Obama, and to attract independent voters in droves.</p>
<p>In <strong>Virginia</strong>—which went for Obama last year, and elected Democratic -senators in the last two cycles and Democratic governors throughout this decade—-Republican Bob McDonnell ran as a practical conservative with an extensive policy agenda and was elected governor by an enormous 18-point margin. He produced concrete proposals on transportation and education but was also forthright about his conservative views on taxes and his opposition to abortion and gun control. In <strong>deeply blue New Jersey</strong>, which Obama won last year by double digits, Republican Chris Christie let the incumbent Democrat embrace Obama, refused to run away from his own party, and won the governorship decisively. He, too, is pro-life; he opposed gay marriage and even associated himself with several GOP governors who had refused to accept stimulus funds. <strong>Both Republicans won independent voters by roughly a 2-to-1 margin</strong>.</p>
<p>In the special election for <strong>New York&#8217;s 23rd Congressional District</strong>, Democrat Bill Owens defeated Conservative Party candidate Doug Hoffman a few days after the liberal Republican Dede Scozzafava (who had run to the left of the Democrat on key issues) dropped out of the race. The peculiar circumstances of that contest, with prominent conservatives supporting Hoffman over Scozzafava, have been taken by Democrats eager for good news as proof of a Republican breakdown. The day after the election, White House political adviser David Axelrod even went so far as to say that the victory &#8220;should be reassuring to Democrats.&#8221;</p>
<p>But, in fact, the message of that race was largely the same as those of New Jersey and Virginia: in this political climate, Republicans can win by nominating an identifiably Republican right-of-center candidate in tune with local voters. It seems clear that had they done so from the outset in upstate New York they would have won there, even though Obama won the district comfortably last year. For decades, almost no New York Republicans have been elected without the endorsement of the state&#8217;s long-established Conservative Party—that dynamic in this case hardly indicates new divisions on the right—and Republican leaders this year clearly erred by choosing (without a primary) a candidate well to the left of the district. Even so, Owens defeated Hoffman by a mere 4,218 votes, while Scozzafava, who withdrew at the last minute but still appeared on the ballot, received 6,986 votes. And every poll of the district in recent weeks suggested that the same uneasy mood prevailed there as in New Jersey and Virginia.</p>
<p>That mood is the crucial fact of this moment in our politics. It does not signify a mass migration into Republican ranks, only deep anxiety regarding what the Democrats are up to, and a renewed openness to hear what Republicans have to say. It means that <strong>Bush fatigue</strong> is in the past, early signs of <strong>Obama fatigue</strong> are emerging, and Republicans have an opportunity to win independents again if they can speak to their concerns.</p>
<p>Last week&#8217;s elections won&#8217;t fundamentally transform our politics, but they will likely help the GOP continue to build its strength. They will persuade some serious Republicans around the country to run for Congress next year, now that it&#8217;s clear that serious Republicans can win. That is just what happened in the first <strong>midterm elections</strong> of the last Democratic president&#8217;s term: most of the winning candidates in the <strong>1994 Republican takeover of Congress</strong> decided to run only after seeing Christine Todd Whitman and George Allen win the governorships of New Jersey and Virginia in 1993.</p>
<p>The results will also make some moderate Democrats very nervous about the health-care and <strong>cap-and-trade</strong> bills being pursued by their leaders. Both bills are political risks—support for the health-care bill hovers around 40 percent in recent polls and a small majority opposes it, and the higher utility costs that would follow cap-and-trade legislation would surely be deeply unpopular in much of the country. Both would have to be passed on essentially party-line votes, leaving Democrats answerable to voters for their consequences. In both cases, too, last week&#8217;s elections will reinforce Republican unity.</p>
<p><strong>The fact is, we remain a two-party nation</strong>. Republicans are not in the midst of a destructive civil war, any more than the Democrats were when they kicked out <strong>Joe Lieberman</strong> in 2006. When it comes to the major debates of the moment—health care, energy, the budget, even most social issues—the Democratic Party is far more divided than the GOP. <strong>Republican Party identification remains low (about 25 percent, compared with the Democrats&#8217; 35 percent), but in a country where 40 percent of voters identify as conservative and only 20 percent as liberal (according to a Gallup poll released last month), the more conservative party isn&#8217;t going anywhere.</strong></p>
<p>Rather than a civil war, we appear to be witnessing the beginnings of a significant Republican revival. The Grand Old Party is finding its footing again in Congress and the states, and behind the scenes there is a growing intellectual effort to develop the next conservative agenda—focused in particular on easing the burdens faced by middle-class parents and contending with the bleak long-term federal budget outlook. Much work remains on that front, but early indications suggest that this work—substantive policy development, seeking to apply conservative principles to the enormous problems of the moment—not only will help Republicans speak more effectively to middle-class voters, but will also help the party&#8217;s conservatives and moderates hone their common voice. Issue by issue, it turns out they don&#8217;t disagree all that much.</p>
<p>None of this means that President Obama has lost all his appeal, or that the Democrats don&#8217;t have an opportunity to advance their agenda in the coming year. It does mean, however, that liberals in Washington would do well to let go of the Republican breakdown narrative, take a real look at the mood of the country and the state of their own party&#8217;s prospects, and pull back to the center—or suffer the consequences.<br />
<strong><br />
Levin is the editor of National Affairs and a fellow at the Ethics and Public Policy Center in Washington.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-what-coattails-nov-16th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #11:  &#8220;The Surprising Lessons of Vietnam&#8221;  Nov. 16th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-the-surprising-lessons-of-vietnam-nov-16th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-the-surprising-lessons-of-vietnam-nov-16th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 16 Nov 2009 17:46:13 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1190</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Unraveling the mysteries of Vietnam may prevent us from repeating its mistakes.
By Evan Thomas and John Barry &#124; NEWSWEEK
Published Nov 7, 2009
From the magazine issue dated Nov 16, 2009
Stanley Karnow is the author of Vietnam: A History, generally regarded as the standard popular account of the Vietnam War. This past summer, Karnow, 84, picked up [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Unraveling the mysteries of Vietnam may prevent us from repeating its mistakes.</p>
<p>By Evan Thomas and John Barry | NEWSWEEK<br />
Published Nov 7, 2009</p>
<p>From the magazine issue dated Nov 16, 2009</strong></p>
<p>Stanley Karnow is the author of Vietnam: A History, generally regarded as the standard popular account of the Vietnam War. This past summer, Karnow, 84, picked up the phone to hear the voice of an old friend, Ambassador Richard Holbrooke. The two men had first met when Holbrooke was a young Foreign Service officer in Vietnam in the mid-1960s and Karnow was a reporter covering the war. Holbrooke, who is now the U.S. special representative for Afghanistan and Pakistan, was calling from Kabul. The two friends chatted for a while, then Holbrooke said, &#8220;Let me pass you to General McChrystal.&#8221; Gen. Stanley McChrystal, the commander of U.S. and allied forces in Afghanistan, came on the line. His question was simple but pregnant: &#8220;Is there anything we learned in Vietnam that we can apply to Afghanistan?&#8221; Karnow&#8217;s reply was just as simple: &#8220;The main thing I learned is that we never should have been there in the first place.&#8221;</p>
<p>Words of wisdom, but not all that useful to General McChrystal. Like it or not, he is already in Afghanistan, along with roughly 68,000 American and 35,000 European troops. McChrystal has been charged by President Obama with presenting a strategy for victory, generally defined as standing up the Afghan Army to beat back the Taliban and deny sanctuary to Al Qaeda. An avid reader of history, McChrystal has read Karnow&#8217;s book, but he has also read many others. One that he has read—and reread—is a 1999 book called A Better War, written by Lewis Sorley, a retired Army lieutenant colonel. Sorley argues that, contrary to the conventional wisdom, the United States could have won in Vietnam—if only the U.S. Congress hadn&#8217;t cut off military aid to South Vietnam.</p>
<p>Not surprisingly, the Sorley book is getting a lot of attention at the upper levels of the Pentagon and at McChrystal&#8217;s headquarters in Kabul. Told that NEWSWEEK was looking into the parallels between the Sorley book and General McChrystal&#8217;s situation in Afghanistan, a senior Marine general exclaimed, &#8220;You&#8217;re on to something there!&#8221; (Like other senior military officials contacted by NEWSWEEK, the general declined to be quoted praising a book that argues, though not in so many words, that the military was stabbed in the back by its civilian leaders.)</p>
<p>As he decides how to respond to McChrystal&#8217;s request for at least another 40,000 troops, President Obama has been reading some books, too. One that has caught the attention of some top advisers is Lessons in Disaster, by Gordon Goldstein, recounting how Presidents Kennedy and Johnson were not well advised on Vietnam. The very title of Goldstein&#8217;s book captures the conventional wisdom (at least at the center and left of the political spectrum) that Vietnam was a hopeless, unwinnable war.</p>
<p>But was it? The lessons of Vietnam are not necessarily the ones we glibly assume—chief among them that Afghanistan, like Vietnam, is a quagmire, and that achieving some sort of victory is out of reach. Vietnam has become code for American hubris and inevitable military defeat. &#8220;What ifs&#8221; are always a risky exercise, but some good historians have suggested that there were two moments when victory—or at least a semblance of victory—was possible in America&#8217;s long war in Southeast Asia. The first came early, in 1965. Had Lyndon Johnson moved aggressively into Vietnam then—taking the war to the enemy and cutting off its supply routes into South Vietnam—the North Vietnamese might have backed off. The second fell five years later, when the military was finally having success with a new counterinsurgency strategy. Would more resources and more fighting later in the war have resulted in South Vietnam remaining independent of the communist North, leaving Vietnam divided in the manner of Korea? Some historians now say yes; many others still say no.</p>
<p>What makes the conversation about Sorley&#8217;s thesis especially interesting now, of course, is, as McChrystal asked Karnow, whether there is anything to be learned from Vietnam that would illuminate the way forward in Afghanistan. To be clear: there is no precise parallel to draw between Vietnam and Afghanistan. Every war is different. But the revisionists&#8217; view of Vietnam does shed some light on the issues facing Obama about war leadership. The most surprising guidance Vietnam may have to offer is not that wars of this kind are unwinnable—which is clearly the common wisdom in America—but that they can produce victories if presidents resist the temptation to fight wars halfway or on the cheap. As President Eisenhower liked to say, if you fight, &#8220;you must fight to win.&#8221;</p>
<p>With their natural tendency to wage the last war, armies learn slowly. In World War II, American armed forces fought badly in Africa in 1942–43 and not so well in Italy in 1943–44 before getting it right in France and Germany in 1944–45. In Vietnam in 1965–67, the Americans pursued a misbegotten strategy of &#8220;search and destroy,&#8221; trying to fight an unconventional war with conventional forces that focused on &#8220;body counts&#8221; while the North Vietnamese more shrewdly infiltrated into towns and villages. Not until Gen. Creighton Abrams replaced Gen. William Westmoreland as U.S. commander in 1968 did the Americans smarten up and begin to fight a true counterinsurgency, focusing on protecting the population by a strategy of &#8220;clear and hold.&#8221; Instead of shoving aside the South Vietnamese Army, Abrams built up the local forces until they could stand and fight largely on their own—as they did in 1972, repulsing North Vietnam&#8217;s Easter Offensive with the aid of American airstrikes.</p>
<p>But by then, as Sorley laments in A Better War, it was too late. American public opinion had turned. In 1973, President Nixon and the North Vietnamese signed a peace treaty that allowed Hanoi to keep 150,000 troops in South Vietnam, just waiting on orders to march. In 1974, breaking Nixon&#8217;s promises of continued support to Saigon, the U.S. Congress cut off all aid to South Vietnam. Without logistical support or air cover, the South Vietnamese Army collapsed in 1975 and the communists swept into Saigon. Sorley quotes one of General Abrams&#8217;s closest colleagues, Gen. Bruce Palmer, as saying that Abrams &#8220;died [of cancer in 1974] feeling that we could have won the war. He felt we were on top of it in 1971, then lost our way.&#8221; Ellsworth Bunker, the U.S. ambassador to Saigon who worked with Abrams to turn the war around, felt the same: &#8220;We eventually defeated ourselves,&#8221; Bunker said. </p>
<p>In Iraq and Afghanistan, American forces have also been slow learners. Ever since the Civil War, the American way of war was to overwhelm the enemy with superior firepower. Against the better-led but materially weaker Confederate Army, a war of attrition finally brought results for Gen. Ulysses S. Grant—who had been made commander by President Lincoln only after much trial and error by the Union Army. In Iraq, the learning curve again stretched out for years. After Vietnam, the Army adopted an approach known as <strong>the Powell doctrine</strong> that called for overwhelming force and a quick exit strategy. Forgotten was how to fight a counterinsurgency. At the outset of the Iraq War, U.S. forces overwhelmed the pitiful Iraqi Army—but then got bogged down in a guerrilla struggle. At last realizing the futility of superior &#8220;kinetics&#8221;—roughly speaking, putting a lot of metal in the air—American forces belatedly adopted a counterinsurgency strategy. Using a new field manual—FM 3-24, written under the supervision of Gen. David Petraeus—U.S. forces began to focus on protecting civilians while ruthlessly targeting jihadist leaders. The so-called surge, along with a vigorous effort to negotiate with Sunni enemies and bring them over to our side, worked. It bought the shaky Iraqi government breathing room to establish itself in relative peace. Still marred by violence, Iraq is nowhere near the all-out civil war that had long been predicted.</p>
<p>Now, in Afghanistan, McChrystal is implementing a strategy that draws on the lessons of Iraq—and looks an awful lot like the &#8220;pacification&#8221; program adopted by General Abrams in Vietnam in 1968. By ratcheting back the heavy use (and overuse) of firepower, McChrystal has reduced civilian casualties, which alienate the locals and breed more jihadists. At the same time, U.S. Special Operations Forces use the intelligence gleaned from friendly civilians to find and kill Taliban leaders. That is precisely what <strong>the Phoenix Program</strong> was designed to do 40 years ago in Vietnam: target and assassinate Viet Cong leaders. McChrystal is focusing on recruiting and training Afghan Army and police so they can take over the job of securing Afghanistan as soon as possible. &#8220;Afghanization&#8221; of the war is much the same as &#8220;Vietnamization,&#8221; the strategy adopted—successfully, Sorley argues—before Congress voted an end to aid to the South.</p>
<p>If it was working in Vietnam, will it work in Afghanistan? Contacted by NEWSWEEK, even Sorley wouldn&#8217;t predict. He would say only that if Obama and his advisers are to study the lessons of Vietnam, they should at least be informed by the right ones. With smarter generals and a &#8220;population-centric strategy&#8221;—to use the counterinsurgency term now in vogue—the United States could have enabled South Vietnam to beat back the North.</p>
<p>Or so Sorley contends. Vietnam remains a toxic subject for historians, and Sorley&#8217;s book has inspired no shortage of critics. George Herring, a highly respected historian whose study of Vietnam, America’s Longest War, is a standard text, told NEWSWEEK that he is &#8220;rather appalled that Sorley&#8217;s book is being taken so seriously.&#8221; He acknowledges that the United States and its South Vietnamese allies were doing better by 1971, but notes that Hanoi wanted to prevail more than Saigon or Washington did—and was prepared to pay whatever price, in human terms, was necessary. &#8220;The war could not have been won at a price we were willing to pay,&#8221; he says. A more immediate observer, NEWSWEEK correspondent Ron Moreau, recalls patrolling with South Vietnamese infantry in 1973. The South Vietnamese troops, Moreau says, had become utterly dependent on U.S. air power. Without it, they were reluctant to venture forth against the enemy. Moreau, who now covers the war in Afghanistan for NEWSWEEK, sees the same rickety, corrupt power structure in Kabul that he recalls from Saigon and doubts that America can prop it up indefinitely.</p>
<p>America&#8217;s best chance to win in Vietnam may have come earlier in the war. In 1964–65, the top military leadership understood that to defeat the North, it was necessary to go all-out. As historian Mark Moyar points out in his groundbreaking work, Triumph Forsaken: The Vietnam War 1954–1965, that would have meant a massive bombing campaign, mining Hanoi&#8217;s port, and sending troops into Laos and Cambodia to cut off the North&#8217;s all-important sanctuaries and resupply route, the Ho Chi Minh Trail. But LBJ&#8217;s advisers were reluctant—fearful, in part, of dragging China and the Soviet Union into a larger war. The military pressed—but not very hard. As Brig. Gen. H. R. McMaster shows in Dereliction of Duty: Lyndon Johnson, Robert McNamara, the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and the Lies that Led to Vietnam, the top brass made the classic mistake of telling their political masters what they wanted to hear.</p>
<p>Johnson was horribly conflicted. One of his advisers, Douglass Cater, recalled the president&#8217;s angst: &#8220;I&#8217;d never seen the man in as dejected a mood—he said, &#8216;I don&#8217;t know what to do. If I send more boys in, there&#8217;s going to be killin&#8217;. If I take them out, there&#8217;s going to be more killin&#8217; &#8216; … And he never put a &#8216;g&#8217; on the &#8216;killin&#8217;,&#8217; it was Texas &#8216;killin&#8217;.&#8217; Then he got up and walked out of the room, leaving us in a somewhat shattered state.&#8221; Despite these melodramas, Johnson&#8217;s heart was never in the Vietnam War. He was much more concerned with getting his Great Society legislation through Congress. To avoid a fractious public debate over Vietnam, he tried to slide by without leveling with the American people about the commitment required to win. Inevitably, he just got sucked in deeper, an agony he captured in his colorful way: &#8220;I knew from the start if I left the woman I really loved—the Great Society—in order to fight this bitch of a war on the other side of the world, then I would lose everything at home,&#8221; he told historian Doris Kearns Goodwin. &#8220;All my programs. All my hopes … all my dreams.&#8221;</p>
<p>History may not repeat itself, but, as Mark Twain said, it does have a tendency to rhyme. Interviewed by NEWSWEEK in September as his secret 66-page analysis of the mess in Afghanistan was leaking out, General McChrystal said it was his &#8220;duty,&#8221; his &#8220;sacred duty,&#8221; to tell the president exactly what the military required to win there. McChrystal was clearly mindful of the cautionary tale told by McMaster in Dereliction of Duty. But duty is not a simple notion, and it&#8217;s possible that the range of options presented to the president by McChrystal—to dispatch 40,000 more troops? Or 20,000? Or 80,000?—has been massaged for political effect. The formula used by General Petraeus&#8217;s own counterinsurgency manual—one soldier for every 50 square miles—suggests America would need far more troops, something like a half million all told, to pacify the whole country. An aide to McChrystal, who would not speak for attribution on this sensitive subject, told NEWSWEEK that there&#8217;s &#8220;a bit of a Goldilocks scenario—too hot, too cold, just right&#8221;—in the general&#8217;s recommendation. McChrystal is sensitive to the need to make do with whatever he gets, though if he gets &#8220;the lower number&#8221; (roughly 10,000 to 20,000 troops), says this aide, he will have to &#8220;rethink strategy.&#8221; (Article continued below)</p>
<p>Advertisement<br />
Your video will begin in   seconds<br />
Adjust volume for sound</p>
<p>The Vietnam Wall: What We Left Behind</p>
<p>Just as Afghanistan is not Vietnam, President Obama is not President Johnson. LBJ&#8217;s heart truly did belong to his dream of a Great Society. It&#8217;s not clear what Obama&#8217;s heart belongs to—he is a much more dispassionate figure. Nonetheless, he is undoubtedly thinking about how history will judge him. He may want to show that he is decisive, that he did not just kick the problem down the road. If he decides that Afghanistan is winnable—i.e., that the Afghans can find some lasting measure of security against the Taliban—he will need to give the war his wholehearted backing. It may be true, as Sorley&#8217;s detractors suggest, that by 1972 Vietnam was already lost. But that does not mean it&#8217;s too late to win in Afghanistan. The Taliban are not the North-Vietnamese. When the Americans and Saigon finally found an effective counter-insurgency strategy and took control of the countryside from the Viet Cong, Hanoi responded by sending in whole divisions of battle-tested troops. The Taliban are much weaker and far less organized. They do not have waves of combat troops and armor.</p>
<p>Or Obama may decide that Afghanistan is too hard, that the country&#8217;s leadership is too corrupt; that too many Afghans will forever regard American soldiers as alien occupiers; that a big influx of troops will only fuel the insurgency and make the Afghan military more dependent; that America will not indefinitely tolerate a war that costs more than $40 billion a year and bleeds off hundreds or thousands of young American soldiers. But if that is the case, Obama needs to start preparing for an orderly withdrawal—and explaining to America and the world why it&#8217;s necessary.</p>
<p>Obama&#8217;s pronounced tendency is to try to find a middle ground, a compromise. He may try to find a way to send, say, 20,000 troops and ask McChrystal to make do. If so, he runs the real risk of repeating Johnson&#8217;s mistake of incrementalism—of doing just enough (or so he hoped) to get the enemy to the bargaining table and to keep the hawks at home off his back. Hoping to muddle through only got LBJ stuck deeper in the mud. Afghanistan may not be Vietnam, but Obama risks repeating Johnson&#8217;s mistake.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/16/ce-week-11-the-surprising-lessons-of-vietnam-nov-16th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>9</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  &#8220;Court signals leniency for young&#8221;  Nov. 10th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/11/ce-week-10-court-signals-leniency-for-young-nov-10th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/11/ce-week-10-court-signals-leniency-for-young-nov-10th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 11 Nov 2009 16:02:31 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1180</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Attorney says life sentence for teen lacks decency
by David G. Savage
Los Angeles Times
WASHINGTON – Confronted with the stark reality of a 13-year-old boy sentenced to spend the rest of his life in prison, the Supreme Court justices signaled Monday that they were inclined to limit, or perhaps abolish, the use of life terms for teenagers [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Attorney says life sentence for teen lacks decency<br />
by David G. Savage<br />
Los Angeles Times</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – Confronted with the stark reality of a 13-year-old boy sentenced to spend the rest of his life in prison, <strong>the Supreme Court</strong> justices signaled Monday that they were inclined to limit, or perhaps abolish, the use of life terms for teenagers whose crimes do not involve murder.</p>
<p>The court often has invoked the <strong>Constitution’s ban on “cruel and unusual punishment” to restrict the death penalty</strong>. On Monday, the justices also sounded ready to rule that some states, in particular Florida, had gone too far by sentencing children to life in prison without a chance for a parole.</p>
<p>“To say to any child of 13 that you are only fit to die in prison is cruel,” attorney Bryan Stevenson told the court. “It cannot be reconciled with what we know about the nature of children. It cannot be reconciled with our standards of decency.”</p>
<p>Stevenson is representing Joe Sullivan, who at age 13 was convicted of raping a 72-year-old woman and given a life prison term. Stevenson said rapists in Florida are sentenced, on average, to 10 years in prison. Yet, Sullivan, who already has served 20 years, will die in prison unless the Supreme Court intervenes.</p>
<p>A second case heard Monday involved Terrance Graham, who at 17 was given a life term for his part in an armed robbery of a restaurant and a later home invasion robbery.</p>
<p>Sullivan and Graham are among 109 inmates nationwide who were sentenced to life in prison without parole for nonhomicide crimes.</p>
<p>During oral arguments, most of the justices sounded as though they were inclined to overturn at least some of these sentences as too extreme. However, they differed on how to do it. <strong>Chief Justice John G. Roberts Jr.</strong> offered a middle-ground approach that could overturn prison terms in some cases if the state judges failed to weigh the youthful age of the offender. Roberts said this “case-by-case approach” was wiser than setting a single rule.</p>
<p><strong>Justice Samuel A. Alito Jr.</strong> said he agreed.</p>
<p>But most of the liberal justices hinted they would go further and rule it was always cruel and unusual punishment to impose a life term for an offender who is under age 18 and who did not commit a murder.</p>
<p>“Every state recognizes the difference between an adult and a minor. And you have to make a line. We have it at 18,” <strong>Justice Ruth Bader Ginsburg</strong> said. “The teenager can’t drink, can’t drive, can’t marry. There are many (legal) limitations on children just because they are children.”</p>
<p>Only <strong>Justice Antonin Scalia</strong> defended Florida’s policy, saying the court should look to history.</p>
<p>“When the ‘cruel and unusual’ clause was adopted (in 1791), 12 years was viewed as the year when a person reaches maturity,” Scalia said. “And then all felonies (were subject to) the death penalty.”</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/11/ce-week-10-court-signals-leniency-for-young-nov-10th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>31</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  2009 Mt. Spokane High School Mock Election</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-2009-mt-spokane-high-school-mock-election/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-2009-mt-spokane-high-school-mock-election/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 09 Nov 2009 06:11:17 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[FOR FUN]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1172</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[ VOTE TOTALS	
1.)	Do you think that every American should have the right to universal health-care coverage or just to the coverage they can properly afford?
•	784 Total Votes
o	Universal.	                             [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong> VOTE TOTALS	</strong></p>
<p>1.)	<em>Do you think that every American should have the right to universal health-care coverage or just to the coverage they can properly afford?</em><br />
•	<strong>784 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Universal.	                                                o	354 votes     45%<br />
o	What they can afford.	                        o	364 votes     46%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum. 	o	  66 votes       8%</p>
<p>2.)<br />
•	<em>Should the United States increase social security payroll taxes by 2% in order for the federal government to ensure income security for future generations of senior citizens?</em><br />
•	<strong>771 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Yea.	                                                        o	359 votes     47%<br />
o	Nay.	                                                        o	298 votes     38%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum.	o	114 votes     15%</p>
<p>3.)<br />
•	<em>Should the Selective Service System, which would most likely be the basis for a modern military draft, be expanded to include women?	</em><br />
•	<strong>772 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Yea.	                                                        o	328 votes     43%<br />
o	Nay.	                                                        o	348 votes     45%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum.	o	  96 votes     12%</p>
<p>4.)<br />
•	<em>Should laws such as the Equal Protection Clause, which states: “No state shall…deny to any person within its jurisdiction the equal protection of the laws,” apply to illegal aliens?</em>	<strong>•	775 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Yea.	                                                       o	229 votes     30%<br />
o	Nay.	                                                       o	444 votes     57%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum. o	102 votes     13%</p>
<p>5.)<br />
•	<strong>Referendum 71: 	•	776 Total Votes</strong><br />
<em> “The legislature passed Engrossed Second Substitute Senate Bill 5688 concerning right and responsibilities of state-registered domestic partners… This bill would expand the rights, responsibilities, and obligations accorded state-registered same-sex and senior domestic partners to be equivalent to those of married spouses, except that a domestic partnership is not a marriage.” Should this bill be:	</em><br />
o	Approved.	                                                o	345 votes     44%<br />
o	Rejected.	                                                o	280 votes     36%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum.	o	151 votes     20%</p>
<p>6.)<br />
•	<em>When considering the United States’ responsibilities concerning the war in Afghanistan which option do you prefer?</em><br />
•	<strong>781 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Decrease Troop Number: train, equip, and advise Afghan Security forces to better protect themselves.	                                                o	315 votes     40%<br />
o	Maintain Troop Number: American troops should conduct the counterinsurgency campaign against the Taliban. 	                                        o	183 votes     23%<br />
o	Increase Troop Number: Follow General McCrystal’s plan of providing an additional 40,000 troops to escalate the removal of terrorist networks.	o	139 votes 18%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum.	o	144 votes 19%</p>
<p>7.)<br />
•	<em>Should the government ensure a guaranteed college education to those who desire to pursue it by raising federal taxes in some areas?</em><br />
<strong>•	768 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Yea.	                                                               o	314 votes     41%<br />
o	Nay.	                                                               o	364 votes     47%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum          o	  90 votes     12%</p>
<p>8.)<br />
•	<em>“The U.S. government&#8217;s $6.4 billion swine flu vaccination program is likely to put the American public health sector under unprecedented strain and expose serious shortcomings, experts say.”</em><br />
<strong>•	764 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Our health-care sector should continue to focus solely on the swine flu epidemic.<br />
                                                                        o	103 votes     13%<br />
o	Our health-care sector should reconfigure the resource distribution to over multiple threats simultaneously. 	                                        o	532 votes     70%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum. 	o	129 votes     17%</p>
<p>9.)<br />
•	<em>Do you feel things in this country are generally going in the right direction or do you feel things are heading in the wrong direction?</em><br />
<strong>•	794 Total Votes</strong><br />
o	Right direction.	                                        o	100 votes     12%<br />
o	Wrong direction.	                                o	403 votes     51%<br />
o	Holding steady.                                   	o	180 votes     23%<br />
o	I choose not to vote on this referendum.	o	111 votes     14%</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-2009-mt-spokane-high-school-mock-election/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>10</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  &#8220;Sources say Obama plans Afghan surge&#8221;  Nov. 8th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-sources-say-obama-plans-afghan-surge-nov-8th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-sources-say-obama-plans-afghan-surge-nov-8th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 09 Nov 2009 04:52:07 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1168</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[More than 30,000 troops would be deployed next year
Mcclatchy
The Spokesman-Review
Coalition forces in Afghanistan now total 67,000 U.S. troops and 42,000 troops from other countries.
WASHINGTON – President Barack Obama is nearing a decision to send more than 30,000 additional U.S. troops to Afghanistan next year, but he may not announce it until after he consults with [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>More than 30,000 troops would be deployed next year<br />
Mcclatchy<br />
The Spokesman-Review</strong></p>
<p>Coalition forces in Afghanistan now total 67,000 U.S. troops and 42,000 troops from other countries.</p>
<p>WASHINGTON – President Barack Obama is nearing a decision to send more than 30,000 additional U.S. troops to Afghanistan next year, but he may not announce it until after he consults with key allies and completes a trip to Asia later this month, administration and military officials have told McClatchy Newspapers.</p>
<p>As it now stands, the administration’s plan calls for sending three Army brigades from the 101st Airborne Division at Fort Campbell, Ky., and the 10th Mountain Division at Fort Drum, N.Y., and a Marine brigade, for a total of as many as 23,000 additional combat and support troops.</p>
<p>Another 7,000 troops would man and support a new division headquarters for the international force’s Regional Command South in Kandahar, the Taliban birthplace where the U.S. is due to take command in 2010. Some 4,000 additional U.S. trainers are likely to be sent as well, the officials said.</p>
<p>The first additional combat brigade probably would arrive in Afghanistan next March, the officials said, with the other three following at roughly three-month intervals, meaning that all the additional U.S. troops probably wouldn’t be deployed until the end of next year. Army brigades number 3,500 to 5,000 soldiers; a Marine brigade has about 8,000 troops.</p>
<p>The plan would fall well short of the 80,000 troops that Army Gen. Stanley McChrystal, the top U.S. military commander in Afghanistan, suggested as a “low-risk option” that would offer the best chance to contain the Taliban-led insurgency and stabilize Afghanistan.</p>
<p>It splits the difference between two other McChrystal options: a “high-risk” one that called for 20,000 additional troops and a “medium-risk” one that would add 40,000 to 45,000 troops.</p>
<p>The officials, all of whom spoke on the condition of anonymity because they weren’t authorized to discuss internal administration planning, cautioned that Obama’s decision isn’t final, and won’t be until after administration officials discuss it with NATO allies at a Nov. 23 meeting of the alliance’s North Atlantic Council and its Military Committee.</p>
<p>Coalition forces now total 67,000 U.S. troops and 42,000 troops from other countries. The Army’s counterinsurgency manual estimates that an all-out counterinsurgency campaign in a country with Afghanistan’s population would require about 600,000 troops.</p>
<p>Although the administration privately is holding out little hope of persuading Canada or the Netherlands to abandon their plans to withdraw combat troops, much less getting additional allied troops, it wants to avoid creating the impression – at home and abroad – that the U.S. “is going it alone” in Afghanistan, said one military official.</p>
<p>Administration officials also want time to launch a public relations offensive to convince an increasingly skeptical public and a wary Democratic Congress that the war, now in its ninth year and inflicting rising casualties, is one of “necessity,” as Obama said earlier this year.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-sources-say-obama-plans-afghan-surge-nov-8th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>6</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  &#8220;Jobless rate puts heat on Obama&#8221;  Nov. 7th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-jobless-rate-puts-heat-on-obama-nov-7th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-jobless-rate-puts-heat-on-obama-nov-7th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 09 Nov 2009 04:31:48 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1160</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Critics call for faster, bolder initiatives
by Neil Irwin And Michael A. Fletcher
Washington Post
WASHINGTON – The jump in the unemployment rate to 10.2 percent, reported Friday, suggests that the job market could take longer than expected to recover and deepens the pressure on President Barack Obama to come up with more immediate solutions.
The jobless rate crossed [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Critics call for faster, bolder initiatives<br />
by Neil Irwin And Michael A. Fletcher<br />
Washington Post</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – The jump in the unemployment rate to 10.2 percent, reported Friday, suggests that the job market could take longer than expected to recover and deepens the pressure on President Barack Obama to come up with more immediate solutions.</p>
<p>The jobless rate crossed into double digits last month, from 9.8 percent in September, the Labor Department reported. That is the highest level since 1983 and evidence that the economy, though expanding, has not yet grown enough to end the brutal conditions facing American workers.</p>
<p>A broader measure of joblessness that includes people working part time for lack of full-time positions and those who have given up looking for work out of frustration rose to 17.5 percent from 17 percent.</p>
<p>Economists have been projecting that job growth would resume early in 2010, and the unemployment rate would start coming down by the middle of the year. But that forecast is in doubt because job losses in the last few months are only decelerating very slowly. Typically after a recession, the jobless rate keeps increasing for a few months, but at a more gradual rate. That tapering off hasn’t happened yet.</p>
<p>“This is the worst labor market most of us have ever seen,” said Scott Anderson, senior economist at Wells Fargo.</p>
<p>Even the good news in the report wasn’t all that good: Employers slashed 190,000 jobs in the month, the sort of cuts found in a run-of-the-mill recession. That figure seems encouraging only when compared to job losses that ran at several times that rate earlier in the year.</p>
<p>The weak numbers confront the Obama administration with a difficult situation. The economy grew at a 3.5 percent rate in the third quarter, as measured by gross domestic product, and the president and his advisers have presented this as evidence that their policies to arrest the downturn are working.</p>
<p>But 15.7 million Americans were unemployed last month. And in mid-October, a majority of adults viewed Obama’s policies as either making the economy either worse (22 percent) or having no effect (35 percent), according to a Washington Post-ABC News poll.</p>
<p>The administration is pursuing policies that, while less ambitious than the $787 billion stimulus package passed in February, provide targeted help for the economy. On Friday, Obama signed legislation that extends unemployment insurance benefits for up to 20 weeks more and renews an $8,000 tax credit for first-time homebuyers while expanding eligibility.</p>
<p>But rather than offering a short-term fix for joblessness, the White House is now more focused on a longer-term strategy for fueling the economic recovery. Speaking in the Rose Garden on Friday, Obama said his economic advisers are weighing additional measures to create jobs, including new infrastructure spending, renovations to make buildings more energy efficient, and additional support for U.S. exports.</p>
<p>Private economists said those initiatives are likely to have little immediate effect. “The impact will be pretty minimal,” said Dean Baker, co-director of the Center for Economic and Policy Research. “They are good things to do. We should be spending more money weatherizing. It will employ some people.”</p>
<p>Critics, especially on the left, are calling on the president to move faster and take initiatives that pay off sooner.</p>
<p>“Every day, it becomes more urgent that the federal government step up to the plate with bold actions to boost job creation,” said Richard Trumka, president of the AFL-CIO. “Those actions should include urgently needed fiscal relief to state and local governments, community jobs programs, additional investments in infrastructure and green jobs and credit relief to small and medium-sized businesses.”</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/08/ce-week-10-jobless-rate-puts-heat-on-obama-nov-7th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>8</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  &#8220;An extraordinary injustice&#8221;  Nov. 6th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-an-extraordinary-injustice-nov-6th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-an-extraordinary-injustice-nov-6th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 06 Nov 2009 22:43:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1156</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Amy Goodman
The Spokesman-Review
“Extraordinary rendition” is White House-speak for kidnapping. Just ask Maher Arar. He’s a Canadian citizen who was “rendered” by the U.S. to Syria, where he was tortured for almost a year. Just this week, the Second U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals, in New York City, dismissed Arar’s case against the government officials (including [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Amy Goodman<br />
The Spokesman-Review</strong></p>
<p>“Extraordinary rendition” is White House-speak for kidnapping. Just ask Maher Arar. He’s a Canadian citizen who was “rendered” by the U.S. to Syria, where he was tortured for almost a year. Just this week, the Second U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals, in New York City, dismissed Arar’s case against the government officials (including FBI Director Robert Mueller, former Homeland Security Secretary Tom Ridge and former Attorney General John Ashcroft) who allegedly conspired to have him kidnapped and tortured.</p>
<p>Arar is safe now, recovering in Canada with his family. But the decision sends a signal to the Obama administration that there will be no judicial intervention to halt the cruel excesses of the Bush-era “Global War on Terror,” including extraordinary rendition, torture and the use of the “state secrets privilege” to hide these crimes.</p>
<p>Arar’s life-altering odyssey is one of the best-known and best-investigated of those victimized by U.S. extraordinary rendition. After vacationing with his family in Tunisia, Arar attempted to fly home to Canada. On Sept. 26, 2002, while changing planes at JFK Airport, Arar was pulled aside for questioning. He was fingerprinted and searched by the FBI and the New York Police Department. He asked for a lawyer and was told he had no rights.</p>
<p>He was then taken to another location and subjected to two days of aggressive interrogations, with no access to phone, food or a lawyer. He was asked about his membership with various terrorist groups, about Osama bin Laden, Iraq, Palestine and more. Shackled, he was moved to a maximum-security federal detention center in Brooklyn, strip-searched and threatened with deportation to Syria.</p>
<p>Arar was born in Syria and told his captors that if he returned there, he would be tortured. As Arar’s lawyers would later argue, however, that is exactly what they hoped would happen. Arar was eventually allowed a call – he got through to his mother-in-law, who got him a lawyer – and a visit from a Canadian Consulate official.</p>
<p>For nearly two weeks, the U.S. authorities held the Syria threat over his head. Still, he denied any involvement with terrorism. So in the middle of the night, over a weekend, without normal immigration proceedings – without anyone telling his lawyer or the Canadian Consulate – he was dragged in chains to a private jet contracted by the CIA and flown to Jordan, where he was handed over to the Syrians.</p>
<p>For 10 months and 10 days, Maher was held in a dark, damp, cold cell, measuring 6 feet by 3 feet by 7 feet high, the size of a grave. He was beaten repeatedly with a thick electrical cable all over his body, punched, made to listen to the torture of others, denied food and threatened with electrical shock and an array of more horrors. To stop the torture, he falsely confessed to attending terrorist training in Afghanistan. Then, after nearly a year, he was abruptly released to Canada, 40 pounds lighter and emotionally destroyed.</p>
<p>The Canadian government, under conservative Prime Minister Stephen Harper, investigated, found its own culpability in relaying unreliable information to the FBI and settled with Arar, giving him an apology and $10 million. The U.S. government, on the other hand, has offered no apology and has kept Arar on a terrorist watch list. He is not allowed to enter the U.S. Two years ago, he had to testify before Congress via video conference.</p>
<p>He said: “These past few years have been a nightmare for me. Since my return to Canada, my physical pain has slowly healed, but the cognitive and psychological scars from my ordeal remain with me on a daily basis. I still have nightmares and recurring flashbacks. I am not the same person that I was. I also hope to convey how fragile our human rights have become and how easily they can be taken from us by the same governments that have sworn to protect them.”</p>
<p>Given the excesses of the Bush administration and Barack Obama’s promise of change, it has surprised many that these policies are continuing and that Congress and the courts have not closed this chapter of U.S. history. President Obama has never once condemned extraordinary rendition.</p>
<p>Arar’s lawyer, Maria LaHood, of the Center for Constitutional Rights, calls the court decision against Arar “an outrage.” In his dissent, Judge Guido Calabresi wrote, “I believe that when the history of this distinguished court is written, today’s majority decision will be viewed with dismay.” Given the torture that Arar suffered, his own response was remarkably measured: “If anything, this decision is a loss to all Americans and to the rule of law.”</p>
<p><strong>Amy Goodman hosts a daily international TV and radio news hour called “Democracy Now!” that airs on more than 800 stations in North America. Denis Moynihan contributed research to this column. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-an-extraordinary-injustice-nov-6th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #10:  &#8220;Time to end big money influence&#8221;  Nov. 5th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-time-to-end-big-money-influence-nov-5th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-time-to-end-big-money-influence-nov-5th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 06 Nov 2009 20:44:28 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1158</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By Chris Jordan
November 5, 2009
Last week, Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid surprised political observers everywhere with his announcement that the Senate’s health-reform bill would include a public-insurance option.
Despite polls showing strong public support for the proposal, TV pundits declared the public option dead due to a lack of support among moderate democrats.
Why would these democrats [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By Chris Jordan<br />
November 5, 2009</strong></p>
<p>Last week, <strong>Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid</strong> surprised political observers everywhere with his announcement that the Senate’s health-reform bill would include a public-insurance option.</p>
<p>Despite polls showing strong public support for the proposal, TV pundits declared the public option dead due to a lack of support among moderate democrats.</p>
<p>Why would these democrats be so antsy about an idea that was backed by strong majority of voters? Insurance companies have been fighting the public option tooth-and-nail and have been lining the pockets of politicians in the process.</p>
<p>Take for example, Sen. Max Baucus, chairman of the Finance Committee. He almost single-handedly killed the public option when his influential committee passed a bill replacing it with weaker “co-ops.” Not surprisingly, he has received almost $500,000 in campaign contributions from insurance and other health industry lobbyists and their clients.</p>
<p>Baucus may well be a totally honest guy who simply ignores these hundreds of thousands of dollars when deciding how to vote. It’s possible.</p>
<p>But examples like this help explain Congress’ recent approval rating of 21 percent. While giant corporations shell out millions in lobbying and campaign contributions, average citizens feel ignored. Congressmen and -women, in order to win re-election, spend enormous amounts of time raising money when that time should be spent at town halls getting input from the people they represent.</p>
<p>In order to end special interest dominance of our political process, it’s time Americans consider <strong>public financing of federal campaigns</strong>.</p>
<p>No existing reform laws have changed the fundamental reality that politicians rely on big donors and spend far too much time raising funds for the next election. One practical solution is the optional <strong>Clean Elections system being used in Maine and Arizona</strong>.</p>
<p>Under this system, candidates who gather a sufficient number of small contributions from citizens in their district qualify for a grant of public funds to run their campaign. Instead of spending months building connections among wealthy donors, candidates seeking office must go directly to the voters at a grassroots level for support in order to secure funding for their campaigns.</p>
<p>Clean Elections means election outcomes will be increasingly determined by the appeal of a candidate’s message, rather than how much money he or she is able to raise.</p>
<p>One persistent challenge to these sorts of public finance systems has been the Supreme Court. It has ruled that private donations amount to political speech protected by the First Amendment and that “rescue money” provisions are unconstitutional.</p>
<p>Regardless, it’s still possible to set up a public system that is so attractive an option to candidates that it effectively eliminates the incentive for private funding.</p>
<p>Clean Elections has proved to be a successful alternative funding method in Arizona. In 2008, 65 percent of candidates in the state ran as “clean” candidates. While cheaters have occasionally been able to game the system, some tweaks here and there should overcome the issue.</p>
<p>Following the example of Arizona and making improvements over time, Americans should embrace the Clean Elections model as superior to one dominated by the wealthy and special interest groups. Public financing offers great hope of diluting the influence of money in politics and making politicians more connected to their constituents.<br />
<strong><br />
Reach columnist Chris Jordan at opinion@dailyuw.com.<br />
</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/06/ce-week-10-time-to-end-big-money-influence-nov-5th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #9:  &#8220;G.O.P. Wins Two Key Governors’ Races; Bloomberg Prevails in a Close Contest&#8221;  Nov. 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-g-o-p-wins-two-key-governors%e2%80%99-races-bloomberg-prevails-in-a-close-contest-nov-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-g-o-p-wins-two-key-governors%e2%80%99-races-bloomberg-prevails-in-a-close-contest-nov-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 04 Nov 2009 14:30:46 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1152</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By DAVID M. HALBFINGER and IAN URBINA
Republicans swept contests for governor in New Jersey and Virginia on Tuesday as voters went to the polls filled with economic uncertainty, dealing President Obama a setback and building momentum for a Republican comeback attempt in next year’s midterm Congressional elections.
But in a closely watched Congressional race in upstate [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By DAVID M. HALBFINGER and IAN URBINA</strong></p>
<p>Republicans swept contests for governor in New Jersey and Virginia on Tuesday as voters went to the polls filled with economic uncertainty, dealing President Obama a setback and building momentum for a Republican comeback attempt in <strong>next year’s midterm Congressional elections</strong>.</p>
<p>But in a closely watched Congressional race in upstate New York, a Democrat who received a late push from the White House triumphed over a conservative candidate who attracted national backers ranging from <strong>Rush Limbaugh to Sarah Palin, the former Alaska governor</strong>.</p>
<p>In New Jersey, a former federal prosecutor, <strong>Christopher J. Christie</strong>, became the first Republican to win statewide in 12 years by vowing to attack the state’s fiscal problems with the same aggressiveness he used to lock up corrupt politicians.</p>
<p>He overcame a huge Democratic voter advantage and a relentless barrage of negative commercials to defeat <strong>Jon S. Corzine</strong>, an unpopular incumbent who outspent him by more than two to one and drew heavily on political help from the White House, including three visits to the state from President Obama.</p>
<p>“We are in a crisis; the times are extraordinarily difficult, but I stand here tonight full of hope for the future,” said Mr. Christie, 47, who will become New Jersey’s 55th governor. “Tomorrow begins the task of fixing a broken state.”</p>
<p>Mr. Corzine, 62, who entered politics a decade ago after a career at Goldman Sachs, conceded at 10:55 p.m. “It has been quite a journey,” he said. “There’s a bright future ahead for New Jersey if we stay focused on people’s lives, and I’m telling you, I’m going to do that for the rest of my life.”</p>
<p>With 98 percent of precincts reporting, Mr. Christie had 49 percent of the vote, Mr. Corzine 44 percent.</p>
<p>In Virginia, where Mr. Obama was the first Democratic presidential nominee to carry the state since 1964, Robert F. McDonnell, a Republican and former state attorney general, rolled to victory over R. Creigh Deeds, a veteran state senator.</p>
<p>With 99 percent of precincts reporting, Mr. McDonnell had 59 percent and Mr. Deeds 41 percent. Mr. McDonnell’s victory, along with Republican victories in the races for attorney general and lieutenant governor, ended eight years of Democratic control in Richmond.</p>
<p>In New York’s 23rd Congressional District, Douglas L. Hoffman, a little known accountant running on the Conservative Party line, conceded after midnight to his Democratic rival, Bill Owens, after driving a moderate Republican from the race.</p>
<p><strong>The three races marked the first major elections since the country plunged into the worst recession in decades, and basic economic issues — job losses, foreclosures, taxes — were front and center.</strong></p>
<p>In Virginia, Mr. McDonnell, avoided divisive social issues, concentrating instead on his plans to create jobs, improve the economy and fix the state’s transportation problems.</p>
<p>In New Jersey, Mr. Christie held Mr. Corzine, a onetime Goldman Sachs chief executive, accountable for rising unemployment, persistent budget deficits, and his failure to gain control over skyrocketing property taxes, the nation’s highest. Voters embraced Mr. Christie even though he offered little detail about how he would fix the state’s chronic financial problems and instead appealed to voters hungry for change.</p>
<p>Voters in both states remained strongly supportive of President Obama, <strong>exit polls</strong> conducted by Edison Research showed, though they said that was not a factor in their decisions. But independent voters, who in New Jersey favored the president in 2008 and in Virginia split between Mr. Obama and John McCain, delivered strong margins for both Mr. Christie and Mr. McDonnell, the surveys showed.</p>
<p>In New Jersey, a sprawling corruption case begun by Mr. Christie, which culminated in July with the arrests of dozens of politicians and others, appeared to have taken its toll on the Democratic get-out-the-vote machinery. In Hudson County, a party bastion where a number of Democratic officials were charged, only 39 percent of registered voters cast their ballots, county officials said.</p>
<p>The races in New Jersey, Virginia and New York attracted intense interest because they provided the first test of President Obama’s ability to transfer the excitement he unleashed last year to other Democratic candidates.</p>
<p>The White House, to varying degrees, became involved in all three races, worried that defeats would undermine the public’s perceptions of the president’s political clout and his ability to pass major legislation.</p>
<p>With polls of the Virginia race showing Mr. Deeds falling further behind, the White House refrained from an all-out effort on his behalf, though Mr. Obama campaigned with Mr. Deeds twice.</p>
<p>In New York, however, the president’s aides played a pivotal role in helping Mr. Owens over the weekend, engineering a surprise endorsement from the moderate Republican who had abandoned the race under pressure from conservatives.</p>
<p>And in New Jersey, the White House took a firm hand in guiding Mr. Corzine’s re-election campaign, culminating in rallies featuring the president campaigning with the governor in Newark and Camden on Sunday.</p>
<p>The victor in Virginia, Mr. McDonnell, 55, is <strong>a social and fiscal conservative</strong>, but ran on a more moderate platform that appealed to voters in the suburbs in Fairfax County, where he was raised. By contrast, Mr. Deeds, 51, had a difficult time introducing himself to densely populated Northern Virginia.</p>
<p>Mr. Deeds sought to portray Mr. McDonnell as a radical conservative by publicizing his 20-year-old master’s thesis, which criticized working women and single mothers. But polls showed voters found Mr. Deeds’s commercials too negative.</p>
<p>The New York race emerged in the national spotlight after President Obama appointed the district’s long-serving congressman, John M. McHugh, a Republican, as secretary of the Army. Almost immediately after local Republican leaders chose Dede Scozzafava, a supporter of gay rights and abortion rights who embraced the federal stimulus package, she came under attack by conservatives as heretical.</p>
<p>Leading conservative voices lined up behind Mr. Hoffman, of Lake Placid, and opponents of same-sex marriage and abortion flooded the district with volunteers from across the country.</p>
<p>In the final days of the campaign, Ms. Scozzafava stunned her party by withdrawing from the race and then backing Mr. Owens. Vice President Joseph R. Biden Jr. traveled to Watertown on Monday to rally Democrats and disgruntled Republicans, but the event drew only about 200 people.</p>
<p>In New Jersey, Mr. Christie attacked Mr. Corzine’s economic leadership, saying he had driven jobs and residents from the state. The governor countered that Mr. Christie offered no viable plan for digging New Jersey out of its enormous financial hole.</p>
<p>Christopher J. Daggett, a former state and federal environmental official, made a splash with a plan to cut property taxes and a strong debate performance, but was hobbled by weak fund-raising. After reaching 20 percent in one public-opinion poll, he failed to break out of the double digits.</p>
<p>New Jersey was a deep-blue state, and Mr. Obama’s election boosted Democratic registration, giving the party a 700,000-vote advantage. Mr. Corzine assailed Mr. Christie, who was named United States attorney by President George W. Bush in 2001, as a philosophical clone of Mr. Bush.</p>
<p>The White House, viewing New Jersey as its best hope for victory, poured resources into the race. The president’s pollster overhauled the campaign’s message, White House aides reviewed Corzine commercials and attended strategy sessions, and cabinet officials lined up to appear at Mr. Corzine’s side.</p>
<p>But Mr. Corzine’s abiding unpopularity — his highest approval rating followed his 2007 car accident and was chalked up to pity — suggested that even “Obama surge” voters who voted for the first time last year could not tilt the outcome in the governor’s favor.</p>
<p><strong>No issue loomed larger in New Jersey than the economy</strong>, which Mr. Corzine assured residents in January ranked as his No. 1, 2 and 3 priorities. But Mr. Christie never wavered from a simple strategy: making the vote a referendum on Mr. Corzine and highlighting how his supposed Wall Street financial skills had been a bust for the state.<br />
<strong><br />
David Kocieniewski and Nate Schweber contributed reporting.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-g-o-p-wins-two-key-governors%e2%80%99-races-bloomberg-prevails-in-a-close-contest-nov-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #9:  &#8220;Bloomberg Wins 3rd Term as Mayor in Unexpectedly Close Race&#8221;  Nov. 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-bloomberg-wins-3rd-term-as-mayor-in-unexpectedly-close-race-nov-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-bloomberg-wins-3rd-term-as-mayor-in-unexpectedly-close-race-nov-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 04 Nov 2009 14:25:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1150</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By DAVID W. CHEN and MICHAEL BARBARO
Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg pulled out a narrow re-election victory on Tuesday, as voters angry over his maneuver to undo the city’s term limits law and his extravagant campaign spending provided an unexpected lift to his vastly underfinanced challenger, William C. Thompson Jr.
Unofficial returns showed Mr. Bloomberg with 51 [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By DAVID W. CHEN and MICHAEL BARBARO</strong></p>
<p>Mayor Michael R. Bloomberg pulled out a narrow re-election victory on Tuesday, as voters angry over his maneuver to undo the <strong>city’s term limits law</strong> and his extravagant campaign spending provided an unexpected lift to his vastly underfinanced challenger, William C. Thompson Jr.</p>
<p>Unofficial returns showed Mr. Bloomberg with 51 percent and Mr. Thompson with 46 percent. The result will make Mr. Bloomberg only the fourth three-term mayor in the last century.</p>
<p>“Conventional wisdom says historically third terms haven’t been too successful,” the mayor told supporters at the Sheraton New York Hotel in Midtown Manhattan around midnight after a tense night of watching returns. “But we’ve spent the last eight years defying conventional wisdom.”</p>
<p>Still, the margin seemed to startle Mr. Bloomberg’s aides and the city’s political establishment, which had predicted a blowout. <strong>Published polls in the days leading up to the election suggested that the mayor would win by as many as 18 percentage points; four years ago, he cruised to re-election with a 20 percent margin</strong>.</p>
<p>The billionaire mayor had poured <strong>$90 million of his own fortune into the race</strong>, a sum without equal in the history of municipal politics that gave him a 14-to-1 advantage in campaign spending.</p>
<p>But the turnout appeared to be on track to be among the lowest in modern New York history as the mayor’s vaunted campaign machinery failed to deliver the surge of supporters his aides had predicted.</p>
<p>“Everybody was shocked,” a Bloomberg aide said.</p>
<p>Mr. Bloomberg had based his third-term campaign largely on the argument that the city has been better run since he ushered in an era of corporate efficiency and nonpartisan leadership at City Hall. He also pointed to his accomplishments in education, crime reduction and public health.</p>
<p>But voters from Park Slope in Brooklyn to Morrisania in the Bronx seemed torn.</p>
<p>While they praised his competence and intelligence, many were put off by what they saw as Mr. Bloomberg’s heavy-handed move to rewrite the law that would have limited him to two consecutive terms, saying it was obviously self-serving. The mayor had previously opposed any undoing of term limits, which voters had approved twice.</p>
<p>“The main reason I didn’t vote for Bloomberg was the term limits,” said Katherine Krase, a 34-year-old professor, voting at her local school in Park Slope.</p>
<p>At the same school, Gerni Oster, 34, said: “I think that Mayor Bloomberg is too egotistical and arrogant for me to vote for at this point.”</p>
<p><strong>Exit polls indicated that 45 percent of voters said that Mr. Bloomberg’s handling of term limits was a factor in their decision not to vote for him, and roughly the same number said the mayor’s spending on the race was an important factor. Nearly 7 of 10 approved of his job performance.</strong></p>
<p>Bill de Blasio and John C. Liu, both Democrats, were elected public advocate and comptroller, respectively.</p>
<p>The results in the mayor’s race are likely to be personally bruising to Mr. Bloomberg, a man of no small ego who told the public last fall that his financial acumen made him uniquely qualified to pull the city out of a deep economic funk.</p>
<p>Already, Democrats seemed emboldened by the outcome.</p>
<p>“We learned tonight that people do not forget easily,” said Representative Anthony D. Weiner, the Queens Democrat who considered, but then decided against, challenging the mayor. “A lot of people, whether they said it to pollsters or not, were offended by the term limits fight.”</p>
<p>And, addressing a crowd at the New York Hilton in Midtown, Mr. Thompson sounded like a man who was planning another campaign.</p>
<p>“The work we started during this campaign doesn’t end tonight, in fact, it’s just beginning,” he said.</p>
<p>Even those who backed the mayor seemed to do so reluctantly.</p>
<p>Stav Brinbaum, 37, a Web producer from Prospect Heights, Brooklyn, described his own vote for the mayor as “unfortunate.”</p>
<p>“I feel he bought himself the election,” Mr. Brinbaum said, and “ran a smear campaign against a nonexistent opponent.” But, he added, “He’s doing a really good job.”</p>
<p>“If there were somebody stronger running against him, I would have happily voted for them,” said Paul Ranson, 56, a designer also from Prospect Heights. “But there’s not, so I unhappily voted for Bloomberg.”</p>
<p>Mr. Bloomberg’s campaign managers prided themselves on the their communications strategy, which flooded mailboxes, e-mail inboxes and television screens.</p>
<p>But for some on the receiving end, it was just too much. Ken Ficara, 40, a Web developer from the same neighborhood, remained undecided until the day before the election, when he received six automated telephone calls from the Bloomberg campaign.</p>
<p>He updated his Facebook page, writing: “Mike, the more you call me, the less likely I am to vote for you.”</p>
<p>Still, according to exit polls, Mr. Bloomberg tapped into his historic sources of strength: Staten Island and Queens backed him by comfortable margins, as did Jews, white Catholics and those earning more than $200,000.</p>
<p>Mr. Thompson did best in the Bronx, and ran even with Mr. Bloomberg among voters aged 18 to 29.</p>
<p>Though he drew 46 percent of the vote, residents expressed striking unfamiliarity with him, even after a yearlong campaign.</p>
<p>The son a prominent judge, and a product of the Brooklyn Democratic machine, Mr. Thompson seemed to run a conventional municipal campaign designed for a previous decade, and rarely radiated political hunger. Those who backed the mayor pointed to the qualities that first won them over eight years ago, as he moved from the financial services empire he founded, Bloomberg L.P., to elective office: independence from campaign donors and a no-nonsense management style.</p>
<p>“I thing he’s doing a good job,” Luke Geissbuhler, 39, a cinematographer in Prospect Heights in Brooklyn, said. “It gives me great comfort that he’s less prone to be corrupt by way of his wealth.”</p>
<p>A little more than a year ago, the mayoral field was crowded with ambitious Democrats from City Hall to Congress. But once Mr. Bloomberg engineered the bid to overturn term limits, only Mr. Thompson remained, and for that act of political grit, he earned admiration, though not much public support, from the Democratic establishment.</p>
<p>Yet Mr. Thompson struggled to raise money, pulling in less than $6 million, and failed to communicate his central critique of the mayor: That Mr. Bloomberg had circumvented the will of the voters, who twice approved term limits, and ignored the welfare of working-class New Yorkers, favoring his wealthy friends and developers.</p>
<p>But Mr. Bloomberg was often more adept at framing the debate. He put Mr. Thompson on the defensive early on, challenging his record at the Board of Education and at the comptroller’s office. But what some voters seemed to really remember from the campaign was his spending; the mayor poured some $15,000 an hour into the race in the final months.</p>
<p>“The Yankees buy pennants and we buy mayoralties,” said Mr. Ficara, the Web developer from Prospect Heights.<strong></p>
<p>Reporting was contributed by Flora Fair, Joel Stonington, Mathew R. Warren and Karen Zraick.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-bloomberg-wins-3rd-term-as-mayor-in-unexpectedly-close-race-nov-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #9:  &#8220;Nearly half of U.S. kids will use food stamps&#8221;  Nov. 3rd</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-nearly-half-of-u-s-kids-will-use-food-stamps-nov-3rd/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-nearly-half-of-u-s-kids-will-use-food-stamps-nov-3rd/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 04 Nov 2009 14:11:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Federalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1144</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Researchers study three decades worth of data
by Lindsey Tanner
Associated Press
CHICAGO – Nearly half of all U.S. children and 90 percent of black youngsters will be on food stamps at some point during childhood, and fallout from the current recession could push those numbers even higher, researchers say.
The estimate comes from an analysis of 30 years [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Researchers study three decades worth of data<br />
by Lindsey Tanner<br />
Associated Press</strong></p>
<p>CHICAGO – Nearly half of all U.S. children and 90 percent of black youngsters will be on food stamps at some point during childhood, and fallout from the current recession could push those numbers even higher, researchers say.</p>
<p>The estimate comes from an analysis of 30 years of national data, and it bolsters other recent evidence on the pervasiveness of youngsters at economic risk. It suggests that almost everyone knows a family who has received food stamps, or will in the future, said lead author Mark Rank, a sociologist at Washington University in St. Louis.</p>
<p>“Your neighbor may be using some of these programs, but it’s not the kind of thing people want to talk about,” Rank said.</p>
<p>The analysis was released Monday in the November issue of Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine. The authors say it’s a medical issue pediatricians need to be aware of because children on food stamps are at risk for malnutrition and other ills linked with poverty.</p>
<p>“This is a real danger sign that we as a society need to do a lot more to protect children,” Rank said.</p>
<p><strong>Food stamps are a Department of Agriculture program for low-income individuals and families, covering most foods although not prepared hot foods or alcohol. For a family of four to be eligible, their annual take-home pay can’t exceed about $22,000</strong>.</p>
<p>According to a USDA report released last month, 28.4 million Americans received food stamps in an average month in 2008, and about half were younger than age 18. The average monthly benefit per household totaled $222.</p>
<p>Rank and Cornell University sociologist Thomas Hirschl studied data from a nationally representative survey of 4,800 American households interviewed annually from 1968 through 1997 by the University of Michigan. About 18,000 adults and children were involved.</p>
<p>Overall, about 49 percent of all children were on food stamps at some point by the age of 20, the analysis found. That includes 90 percent of black children and 37 percent of whites. The analysis didn’t include other ethnic groups.</p>
<p>The time span included typical economic ups and downs, including the early 1980s recession. That means similar portions of children now and in the future will live in families receiving food stamps, although ongoing economic turmoil may increase the numbers, Rank said.</p>
<p>An editorial in the medical journal agreed.</p>
<p>“The current recession is likely to generate for children in the United States the greatest level of material deprivation that we will see in our professional lifetimes,” Stanford pediatrician Dr. Paul Wise wrote.</p>
<p>Wise said the Archives study estimate is believable.</p>
<p>“I find it terribly sad, but not surprising,” Wise said.</p>
<p>James Weill, president of Food Research and Action Center, a Washington-based advocacy group, said the analysis underscores that “there are just very large numbers of people who rely on this program for a month, six months, a year.”</p>
<p>“What I hope comes out of this study is an understanding that food stamp beneficiaries aren’t them – they’re us,” Weill said.</p>
<p>The analysis is in line with other recent research suggesting that more than 40 percent of U.S. children will live in poverty or near-poverty by age 17; and that half will live at some point in a single-parent family. Also, other researchers have estimated that slightly more than half of adults will use food stamps at some point by age 65.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-nearly-half-of-u-s-kids-will-use-food-stamps-nov-3rd/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #9:  &#8220;Voters wary of ballot measures&#8221;  Nov. 3rd</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-voters-wary-of-ballot-measures-nov-3rd/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-voters-wary-of-ballot-measures-nov-3rd/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 04 Nov 2009 14:08:39 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1142</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Alison Boggs and Jim Camden
The Spokesman-Review
Voters seemed wary Tuesday of ballot measures that would cost them money or mandate too much more change.
Kootenai County voters shot down a pair of ballot measures would have increased the sales tax for 10 years to pay for a jail expansion and provide property tax relief.
In Washington, voters [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by Alison Boggs and Jim Camden<br />
The Spokesman-Review</strong></p>
<p>Voters seemed wary Tuesday of ballot measures that would cost them money or mandate too much more change.</p>
<p>Kootenai County voters shot down a pair of ballot measures would have increased the sales tax for 10 years to pay for a jail expansion and provide property tax relief.</p>
<p>In Washington, <strong>voters turned thumbs down to Initiative 1033</strong>, new spending limits on state, county and city governments that elected officials had said were so radical they’d wind up hamstringing services. <strong>Voters were narrowly passing Referendum 71</strong>, a measure to ratify expanded rights to domestic partnerships, but the final decision might not be known for days.</p>
<p>Spokane city voters were narrowly rejecting a new $33 million bond issue for city fire equipment and stations, but fire officials were trying to remain “cautiously optimistic” that they would gain enough votes in counts in the coming weeks.</p>
<p>There’s no such wait for a proposed change to Spokane’s City Charter: Voters soundly rejected a package of amendments that would have set new rules for wages, workplaces, neighborhood development and environmental protection.</p>
<p>Here’s a rundown of some of the top ballot measures:</p>
<p><strong>Initiative 1033</strong></p>
<p>This was the latest in a long line of attempts by Tim Eyman to put restrictions on government. It tried to attack the ability of the state, counties and cities to spend money, allowing their expenses to go up each year only by a formula that accounts for inflation and population growth. Any money collected above that level would be set aside, and returned the following year as rebates to property taxes.</p>
<p>It drew support from small business coalitions, many Republicans and the populist conservative Tea Party movement. It was blasted by government officials of both political parties in state and local jurisdictions as a dangerous formula in the midst of a recession.</p>
<p>Eyman seemed to acknowledge defeat before the first ballot results were in, e-mailing a copy of his statement to supporters that the campaign was “proud of all our heroic supporters” whatever happened, and listing previous victories at the ballot box. The measure failed decisively in Spokane, Whitman, Garfield and Asotin counties as well as those surrounding the Puget Sound.<br />
<strong><br />
Referendum 71</strong></p>
<p>Social conservatives sought to block expanded legal protections for domestic partnerships that the Legislature approved last spring for same-sex couples and seniors who want to live together without getting married. Those rights were labeled “everything but marriage” in the legislation, but opponents said it essentially allows marriage for same-sex couples.</p>
<p>Approving the referendum meant allowing the law to go into effect, while rejecting the referendum rejected the changes.</p>
<p>Supporters of R-71 raised more than $2 million, which fueled a television ad blitz in the month before the election. Opponents of the measure, who had put it on the ballot, raised about $275,000, and concentrated on yard signs and mailings.</p>
<p>The measure was narrowly passing at press time, but sharply dividing the state. Most counties around the Puget Sound were approving the measure, while the remainder of the state’s counties were heavily rejecting it.</p>
<p><strong>Spokane Proposition 4</strong></p>
<p>Named the Community Bill of Rights by supporters, this proposal offered voters the chance to add nine amendments to the Spokane City Charter. It was drafted in a series of meetings sponsored by Envision Spokane with neighborhood groups, labor unions and environmental organizations, and fine tuned through town hall style meetings.</p>
<p>But the breadth of the amendments, which either had to be approved or rejected as a group, prompted criticism from city officials and business organizations. They said it could saddle the city with costs of guaranteeing health care or make businesses uncompetitive. Most of all, they said, it would spawn lawsuits because many of the concepts were untested.</p>
<p>It failed, nearly 3-to-1 in votes counted Tuesday.</p>
<p>“We think the voters of Spokane realized this is a bad idea,” Brian Murray, a campaign manager for one of the opposition groups, said Tuesday night. Spokane Mayor Mary Verner and business leaders have said they’d be willing to sit down with Envision Spokane to discuss other ways to accomplish some of their goals, he added.</p>
<p>But Brad Read of Envision Spokane said the outcome wasn’t surprising considering opponents heavily outspent them and used dire predictions like “Spokane would cease to exist” if the measure passed. Whether the group would accept an offer to discuss other ways to make changes is unclear, Read added, and there is some skepticism that opponents are willing to negotiate seriously.</p>
<p><strong>Spokane Proposition 1</strong></p>
<p>City voters were also asked to approve a $33 million bond issue for new fire engines, equipment and stations. The 10-year bond issue would cost a homeowner $27 for every $100,000 of assessed value of property; it’s designed to replace a bond issue passed in 1999, but raises the cost by about $10 per $100,000. It needed a 60 percent supermajority, and in Tuesday’s tally had collected only 58.6 percent.</p>
<p>Assistant Chief Brian Schaeffer said supporters hoped to close the gap in upcoming ballot counts. If that doesn’t work, the Fire Department will try again, but not before meeting with voters and asking them if the department should take a different direction.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/11/04/ce-week-9-voters-wary-of-ballot-measures-nov-3rd/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #8:  &#8220;Supreme Court reviewing corporate campaigning Justices could overturn finance restrictions&#8221;</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-supreme-court-reviewing-corporate-campaigning-justices-could-overturn-finance-restrictions/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-supreme-court-reviewing-corporate-campaigning-justices-could-overturn-finance-restrictions/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 27 Oct 2009 04:09:17 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Media]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Supreme Court]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1132</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[David G. Savage / Los Angeles Times 				September 10, 2009
WASHINGTON – The Supreme Court’s conservative bloc sounded poised Wednesday to strike down on free speech grounds a 100-year-old ban against corporations spending large amounts of money to elect or defeat congressional and presidential candidates.
If the justices were to issue such a ruling in the next [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>David G. Savage / Los Angeles Times 				September 10, 2009</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – The Supreme Court’s conservative bloc sounded poised Wednesday to strike down on free speech grounds a 100-year-old ban against corporations spending large amounts of money to elect or defeat congressional and presidential candidates.</p>
<p>If the justices were to issue such a ruling in the next few months, it could reshape American politics, beginning with the congressional campaign in 2010. Big companies and industries – and possibly unions as well – could fund campaign ads to support or defeat members of Congress.</p>
<p>Since 1907, federal law has prohibited corporations from giving money to candidates. And since 1947, corporations and unions have been barred from spending money on their own to urge voters to elect or defeat federal candidates. Corporate executives, as individuals, can contribute money to a corporate political action committee or PAC, but these amounts are relatively modest compared to the funds available to the corporate treasury.<br />
At least 24 states have similar bans on corporate spending in state races.<br />
All those spending limits have come under growing legal attack from conservatives and libertarians who say the government should not be allowed to set limits on campaign spending and electioneering, even when corporate or union money is in play.</p>
<p>Three justices – Antonin Scalia, Anthony Kennedy and Clarence Thomas – have already said they would overrule past decisions that had upheld federal and state restrictions on corporate election spending. Chief Justice John Roberts and Justice Samuel Alito also have said they favor free speech over the campaign funding limits. But they have not yet said whether they would go along and give corporations a free speech right to spend on campaign ads.</p>
<p>That was the issue before the court Wednesday. It was a rare re-argument in a seemingly narrow case of a small nonprofit group called Citizens United. It had produced a video called “Hillary: The Movie,” which was designed to undercut Hillary Rodham Clinton’s 2008 campaign for the presidency. However, it got tied up in a legal battle with the Federal Election Commission.</p>
<p>Because Citizens United is incorporated and received a small amount of corporate money, the group and its movie came under FEC regulation. Any amount of corporate money can trigger regulatory action under the election laws.<br />
In March, the justices debated whether the law should apply to a nonprofit group that produced a campaign-related video. But rather than decide that narrow question, the justices said in June they would focus instead on whether to say that all corporations, like individuals, have a right to spend freely to elect or defeat candidates.</p>
<p>Washington lawyer Ted Olson, the former solicitor general under President George W. Bush, pressed the justices to rule broadly. “Corporations are persons entitled to protection under the First Amendment,” said Olson, who represented Citizens United.</p>
<p>Sens. John McCain, R-Ariz., and Russell Feingold, D-Wis., co-sponsors of the 2002 campaign funding law, were in the courtroom and listened intently to the 90-minute argument. The ruling could strike down part of the McCain-Feingold Act that restricted corporate and union-funded election ads in the months before the election.</p>
<p>The court will meet behind closed doors later this week to vote on the case. A decision could come within a few months.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-supreme-court-reviewing-corporate-campaigning-justices-could-overturn-finance-restrictions/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #8:  NATO Ministers Endorse Wider Afghan Effort&#8221;  Oct. 24th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-nato-ministers-endorse-wider-afghan-effort-oct-24th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-nato-ministers-endorse-wider-afghan-effort-oct-24th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 26 Oct 2009 22:24:10 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1128</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By THOM SHANKER and MARK LANDLER
BRATISLAVA, Slovakia — Defense ministers from NATO on Friday endorsed the ambitious counterinsurgency strategy for Afghanistan proposed by Gen. Stanley A. McChrystal, giving new impetus to his recommendation to pour more troops into the eight-year-old war.
General McChrystal, the senior American and allied commander in Afghanistan, made an unannounced appearance here [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By THOM SHANKER and MARK LANDLER</strong></p>
<p>BRATISLAVA, Slovakia — Defense ministers from <strong>NATO</strong> on Friday endorsed the ambitious counterinsurgency strategy for Afghanistan proposed by <strong>Gen. Stanley A. McChrystal</strong>, giving new impetus to his recommendation to pour more troops into the eight-year-old war.</p>
<p>General McChrystal, the senior American and allied commander in Afghanistan, made an unannounced appearance here on Friday to brief the defense ministers on his strategic review of a war in which the American-led campaign has lost momentum to a tenacious <strong>Taliban</strong> insurgency.</p>
<p>“What we did today was to discuss General McChrystal’s overall assessment, his overall approach, and I have noted a broad support from all ministers of this overall counterinsurgency approach,” said NATO’s secretary general, Anders Fogh Rasmussen.</p>
<p>The acceptance by NATO defense ministers of General McChrystal’s approach did not include a decision on new troops, and it was not clear that their judgment would translate into increased willingness by their governments, many of which have been seeking to reduce their military presence in Afghanistan, to contribute further forces to the war.</p>
<p>But it was another in a series of judgments that success there could not be achieved by a narrower effort that did not increase troop levels in Afghanistan substantially and focused more on capturing and killing terrorists linked to <strong>Al Qaeda</strong> — a counterterrorism strategy identified with Vice President Joseph R. Biden Jr.</p>
<p>The NATO briefing, though held privately, thrusts General McChrystal back into the debate over what President Obama should do about Afghanistan — a role that has raised tensions between the general and the White House in the past, and even drawn a rebuke from his boss, <strong>Defense Secretary Robert M. Gates</strong>.</p>
<p>NATO’s support got no official reaction from the White House. But an administration official noted that an endorsement by defense ministers was not the same as an endorsement by the alliance’s political leadership. Other officials were emphatic that Mr. Obama would not be stampeded in his deliberations and suggested that the NATO statement should not be taken as evidence that the White House had made a decision about how to proceed.</p>
<p>“In no way, shape or form are the president’s options constrained,” said Richard C. Holbrooke, the administration’s special representative for Afghanistan and Pakistan, speaking to reporters at the State Department.</p>
<p>General McChrystal’s review calls for adopting a full-scale counterinsurgency strategy that would protect population centers and accelerate training of Afghan Army and police units — both of which would require significant numbers of fresh troops. NATO diplomats noted that it was difficult to see how an acceptance of this broad strategy could be viewed as anything but an endorsement of the need to increase both military and civilian contributions.</p>
<p>Mr. Gates, who has kept his views about additional troops close to his vest and has discouraged his commanders from lobbying too publicly for their positions, declined to be drawn out on this assessment.</p>
<p>“For this meeting, I am here mainly in listening mode,” Mr. Gates said in Bratislava after the NATO briefing, although he noted that “many allies spoke positively about General McChrystal’s assessment.”</p>
<p>Mr. Gates said the administration’s decision on Afghanistan was still two or three weeks away, and he cautioned that it was “vastly premature” to draw conclusions now about whether the president would deploy more troops. He said that allied defense ministers had not voiced concerns about the administration’s decision-making process.</p>
<p>Although NATO will not meet until next month to decide whether to commit more resources to Afghanistan, Mr. Gates did reveal that he had received indications that some allies were prepared to increase their contributions of civilian experts or troops, or both.</p>
<p>Britain and other NATO members have had their own fractious political debates over troop levels. A retired top general in Britain recently said that the government of <strong>Prime Minister Gordon Brown</strong> had rebuffed his requests for more troops, a charge Mr. Brown denied.</p>
<p>Separate from his strategic review, General McChrystal has submitted a request for forces, which is now working its way through both the American and NATO chains of command.</p>
<p>The options submitted by General McChrystal range to a maximum of 85,000 more troops, although his leading option calls for increasing forces by about 40,000, according to officials familiar with the proposal.</p>
<p>The pressure for more troops was a theme throughout the day at the NATO meeting, as other senior international representatives told defense ministers of the need to increase their commitments in order to succeed in Afghanistan.</p>
<p><strong>The United Nations</strong> special representative for Afghanistan, Kai Eide, who also flew to the Slovakian capital to meet the ministers, stressed that “additional international troops are required.” He also told the allies, “This cannot be a U.S.-only enterprise.”</p>
<p>Mr. Eide acknowledged that it might be difficult to rally public support for force contributions while allegations of election fraud continued to taint the government of <strong>President Hamid Karzai</strong>.</p>
<p>Senior American military officers have already endorsed General McChrystal’s overall strategy, including <strong>Adm. Mike Mullen, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and Gen. David H. Petraeus, the American commander in the Middle East.</strong></p>
<p>Senior NATO officials made clear that additional commitments should go beyond combat forces to include trainers for the Afghan Army and police force, as well as civilians to help rebuild the economy and restore confidence in the government.</p>
<p>“What we need is a much broader strategy, which stabilizes the whole of Afghan society, and this is the essence in the recommendations presented by General McChrystal,” said Mr. Rasmussen, the NATO secretary general. “This won’t happen just because of a good plan. It will also need resources — people and money.”</p>
<p>General McChrystal was not scheduled to make any public comments here. The general’s reticence was not unexpected, as some administration officials have criticized his recent statements as an attempt to press the White House to act.</p>
<p>The general and his aides have denied they were playing politics. General McChrystal said in a recent interview that success required a unified, government-wide strategy.</p>
<p>NATO officials assessing the potential for allied troop contributions said that delicate negotiations were under way, and that NATO capitals were watching the Obama administration for signals even while they sent signals of their own.</p>
<p><strong><br />
Thom Shanker reported from Bratislava, and Mark Landler from Washington.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-nato-ministers-endorse-wider-afghan-effort-oct-24th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>5</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #8:  &#8220;Bloomberg Sets Record for His Own Spending on Elections&#8221;  Oct. 24th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-bloomberg-sets-record-for-his-own-spending-on-elections-oct-24th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-bloomberg-sets-record-for-his-own-spending-on-elections-oct-24th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 26 Oct 2009 22:16:39 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Media]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1126</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By MICHAEL BARBARO and DAVID W. CHEN
Michael R. Bloomberg, the Wall Street mogul whose fortune catapulted him into New York’s City Hall, has set another staggering financial record: He has now spent more of his own money than any other individual in United States history in the pursuit of public office.
Newly released campaign records show [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By MICHAEL BARBARO and DAVID W. CHEN</strong></p>
<p>Michael R. Bloomberg, the Wall Street mogul whose fortune catapulted him into New York’s City Hall, has set another staggering financial record: <strong>He has now spent more of his own money than any other individual in United States history in the pursuit of public office.</strong></p>
<p>Newly released campaign records show the mayor, as of Friday, had spent <strong>$85 million on his latest re-election campaign, and is on pace to spend between $110 million and $140 million before the election on Nov. 3.</strong></p>
<p>That means Mr. Bloomberg, in his three bids for mayor, will have easily burned through more than <strong>$250 million</strong> — the equivalent of what Warner Brothers spent on the latest Harry Potter movie.</p>
<p>The sum easily surpasses what other titans of business have spent to seek state or federal office. <strong>New Jersey’s Jon S. Corzine has plunked down a total of $130 million in two races for governor and one for United States Senate. Steve Forbes poured $114 million into his two bids for president. And Ross Perot spent $65 million in his quest for the White House in 1992 and $10 million four years later</strong>.</p>
<p>“I have never seen anything like this — it’s off the charts,” said Jennifer A. Steen, a lecturer in political science at Yale who has studied self-financed candidates for the last decade. “He’s in a league of his own.”</p>
<p>Mr. Bloomberg has used his wealth, estimated at $16 billion, to establish what appears to be insurmountable financial dominance in the race.</p>
<p>He has spent at least 14 times what his Democratic rival in the race, William C. Thompson Jr., has: $6 million. A Thompson campaign spokeswoman on Friday called the mayor’s spending “obscene.”</p>
<p>Since late September, the pace of Mr. Bloomberg’s spending has drastically accelerated: He is now sending <strong>nearly $1 million a day</strong> into the city’s economy. The bulk of the money is devoted to advertising on television, radio and the Web, but much of it bankrol ls a first-class approach to parties, snacks and travel.</p>
<p>The campaign has spent $322,521 on food, $293,953 on transportation, $176,066 on furniture and $39,858 on parking.</p>
<p>His lavish spending has confounded political consultants and campaign finance experts, who said that his popularity with New Yorkers, and his built-in advantages as a two-term incumbent, should be sufficient to win him re-election.  <strong>(Compare/Contrast this with The Doctrine of Sufficiency &#8211; Kautzman)</strong></p>
<p>“The main thing money does is allow you to get name recognition,” said Meredith McGehee, policy director of the Campaign Legal Center, a <strong>watchdog group</strong> in Washington. “But in this case, with Bloomberg, because he’s so well known, it’s more like, he can do it, so why not?”</p>
<p>With more than 100 employees, his campaign now has a staff larger than 97 percent of all businesses in New York City. And his political operation has become a one-man economic stimulus program, buying $8,892 worth of pizza from Goodfellas Brick Oven Pizza on Staten Island and in the Bronx. The company had suffered a big drop in business since the start of the recession.</p>
<p>“It’s a huge help,” said Marc Cosentino, one of the owners of Goodfellas. “They don’t have to economize like everyone else.”</p>
<p>Squier Knapp Dunn, the media company responsible for the mayor’s television ads, has taken in $48,313,776. While most of that money pays for TV time, media companies typically receive fees of about 15 percent.</p>
<p>“A number of firms are practically living off of this,” said Steve Malanga, a senior fellow at the Manhattan Institute.</p>
<p>The spending has drawn howls of protest from good-government groups and advocates of campaign finance reform. In interviews, several said, angrily, that the mayor’s decisions to rewrite New York City’s term limits law and then spend wildly to secure re-election, have undermined democratic principles.</p>
<p>“Whether Bloomberg wins or loses, the toxic combination of mega-spending and crass use of his office to bypass the voters on term limits will always be a stain on his mayoralty,” said Gene Russianoff, staff attorney for the New York Public Interest Research Group.</p>
<p>“These twin assaults on municipal democracy will undermine his political clout in a third term and sadly fuel public skepticism about elections and elected officials,” Mr. Russianoff said.</p>
<p>A spokesman for Mr. Bloomberg’s campaign, Howard Wolfson, defended the spending, saying, “Voters in this race have a choice between one candidate who is independent and doesn’t take a dime from special interests and another who practices politics as usual.”</p>
<p>Mr. Thompson, a Democrat, has had the unenviable task of trying to raise money in the middle of a deep recession, when many voters already assume that Mr. Bloomberg will prevail. Their lack of enthusiasm for Mr. Thompson’s candidacy was reflected in his latest campaign finance disclosure, which showed he had raised $270,000 over the last three weeks.</p>
<p>While donations came in at a much brisker pace than in the previous three-week reporting period, when he raised $114,000, that is unlikely to make a dent in Mr. Bloomberg’s advantage. Factoring in public matching funds, Mr. Thompson will have $3 million in the final week and a half of the race.</p>
<p>“This is a clear indication that the momentum of the mayoral race continues to shift towards Bill Thompson,” said Mike Murphy, a spokesman for the Thompson campaign.</p>
<p>But Mr. Thompson’s fund-raising still badly trails that of the two last Democrats who lost to Mr. Bloomberg: the former public advocate, Mark Green, and Fernando Ferrer, the former Bronx borough president.</p>
<p>The newly released records show that Mr. Bloomberg is handsomely rewarding top aides who take leaves from their City Hall posts to join the campaign. His first deputy mayor, Patricia E. Harris, is earning about $28,000 a month. It is a healthy raise: At City Hall, she made about $21,000 a month.</p>
<p>The mayor also typically showers the aides with additional bonuses after Election Day.</p>
<p>All that money shows how far Mr. Bloomberg has come, wealth-wise. His campaign spending this year will nearly equal what his boyhood hometown of Medford, Mass., population 55,000, devotes to its annual budget. </p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/26/ce-week-8-bloomberg-sets-record-for-his-own-spending-on-elections-oct-24th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>20</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #7:  &#8221; Tax the rich: It’s the American way&#8221;  Oct. 21st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/20/ce-week-7-tax-the-rich-it%e2%80%99s-the-american-way-oct-21st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/20/ce-week-7-tax-the-rich-it%e2%80%99s-the-american-way-oct-21st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 21 Oct 2009 06:17:16 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1120</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Chris Jordan
October 21, 2009
We’ve got a problem, people.
We’ve got a big, trillion-dollar problem. It’s no secret that our federal budget is in trouble, and “in trouble” is probably an understatement.
The economic crisis has forced the government to spend billions in unforeseen expenditures in order to rescue the financial system from disaster and stimulate the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><em>by Chris Jordan<br />
October 21, 2009</em></p>
<p>We’ve got a problem, people.</p>
<p>We’ve got a big, trillion-dollar problem. It’s no secret that our federal budget is in trouble, and “in trouble” is probably an understatement.</p>
<p>The economic crisis has forced the government to spend billions in unforeseen expenditures in order to rescue the financial system from disaster and stimulate the economy. As a result, the budget deficit has skyrocketed.</p>
<p>Recessions suck.</p>
<p>In order to begin to tackle this problem and bring things back into balance, it’s time we raised taxes on the rich. Yep, I said it.</p>
<p>Why, you ask, don’t we just cut unnecessary spending instead of burdening people with new taxes? This is a valid point, but if we’re honest about the scope of the problem, we’re going to need both approaches. We should be raising taxes on those at the top while cutting waste.</p>
<p>Raising taxes can be a touchy subject, especially during tough economic times. Hence, I’ve come armed with statistics.</p>
<p>One of the reasons I believe the rich should pay more is that, in recent history, their incomes have ballooned while the rest of us have been stuck in a rut. Despite increases in worker productivity, middle-class wages have remained stagnant. In fact, according to The Wall Street Journal, since 1970, the average CEO income has increased a whopping 730 percent, while worker income has decreased 13 percent ­­­— all this in 2008 dollars.</p>
<p>This growing disparity is dangerous. When an entire generation of workers is worse off than their parents, the American dream is fundamentally threatened.</p>
<p>Today, our federal income tax rate on the highest bracket is 35 percent. Under Clinton in the 1990s, when CEO incomes doubled, it was 39.6 percent. Is President Obama really a “socialist” for suggesting we return to those 1990s levels? A little historical perspective ought to clear things up.</p>
<p>It might shock you that between 1932 and 1981, income tax rates on the highest tax bracket fluctuated between an astonishingly high 63 percent and 92 percent. President Dwight Eisenhower, a Republican, oversaw the highest income tax rates in history and opposed efforts to lower them.</p>
<p>Evan Adam Smith, philosophical father of the free-market system and author of Wealth of Nations, argued for progressive taxation. In that very book, he stated, “It is not very unreasonable that the rich should contribute to the public expense, not only in proportion to their revenue, but something more than in that proportion.”</p>
<p>I am not one who believes the rich to be bad or evil. Clearly, executives who would give themselves outrageous bonuses using taxpayer money lack a sound, moral conscience, but I don’t believe they are the norm. Many wealthy Americans are hard working and brilliant people, who deserve to enjoy the fruits of their labor.</p>
<p>But getting rich is not a one-way street. You don’t become wealthy in a vacuum. You live in a country that supports free enterprise, protects your property rights, allows your wealth to be passed down from generations, and invests in the infrastructure and education that makes this economy, and thus your wealth, possible.</p>
<p>To say the rich owe nothing back to society is absurd. They benefit the most from our system and should, hence, pay the most to ensure its continued strength.</p>
<p>Estimates are that restoring tax rates on the wealthy to levels from the 1990s could generate roughly $400 billion in revenue over 10 years.</p>
<p>I am by no means advocating a return to the days of 92 percent, but increasing that top bracket rate by a couple percentage points could go a long way towards getting our budget crisis under control.</p>
<p><em>Reach columnist Chris Jordan at opinion@dailyuw.com.</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/20/ce-week-7-tax-the-rich-it%e2%80%99s-the-american-way-oct-21st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>30</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #7:  &#8220;Cute kids, repulsive politics&#8221;  Oct. 18th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/18/ce-week-7-cute-kids-repulsive-politics-oct-18th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/18/ce-week-7-cute-kids-repulsive-politics-oct-18th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 18 Oct 2009 18:23:08 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Religion]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1103</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Gary Crooks
The Spokesman-Review
While heading into work on Friday, I saw a small group on the corner of Second Avenue and Lincoln Street waving signs in opposition to Referendum 71, which would give voter approval to the “everything but marriage” law that was adopted by the Legislature last spring. The law grants to registered same-sex [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by Gary Crooks<br />
The Spokesman-Review</strong></p>
<p>While heading into work on Friday, I saw a small group on the corner of Second Avenue and Lincoln Street waving signs in opposition to <strong>Referendum 71</strong>, which would give voter approval to the “everything but marriage” law that was adopted by the Legislature last spring. The law grants to registered same-sex couples the same rights and benefits accorded married couples under state statutes.</p>
<p>Normally, I wouldn’t mind such a political display, but among those holding “Protect Children” placards were children themselves. Do you suppose the kids independently researched the topic before deciding they’d be imperiled if discrimination against same-sex couples were brought to an end? More likely, adults shoved the signs into their hands for emotional appeal. Must be that indoctrination I’ve been hearing about.</p>
<p>The use of children in politics has always bugged me, whether it’s the serene family photos on glossy brochures or those oh-so-cute appearances at political rallies. Then there’s the positioning of children near the lectern to dissuade questions about why politicians were sleeping around. But the anti-Referendum 71 example strikes me as particularly odious, because the signs make it seem like the issue is about child predators and one side is all for them.</p>
<p>The logical leap is that a household with a man and a woman is better for child-rearing. There is no firm empirical evidence of this, but even if there were, there are many socioeconomic factors that determine outcomes for children. Divorce and single parenthood matter. So do income, educational level and the age at which people marry.</p>
<p>So where are the campaigns to prohibit marriage (and the rights that go with it) for those who have low incomes or are under 25 years old or don’t have college degrees? Where are the signs protesting the impending marriages of those who tried it before and failed? There aren’t any, and I wonder why. Isn’t this about the kids?</p>
<p>Mixed message. Speaking of protecting children, a justice of the peace in Hammond, La., is making headlines for refusing to sign a marriage license because the couple is biracial. That’s right, Keith Barnwell turned away the couple because of his concern for their yet-to-be-born children. For one thing, he says, mixed-race couples are more apt to get divorced.</p>
<p>Barnwell says he’s not racist, because he has officiated at many marriages involving African-American men and women. But why would he do that when those couples have an above-average divorce rate? Don’t those kids matter?</p>
<p>Maybe we need to pass a law that prohibits adults from using children as an excuse for their bigotry.</p>
<p>You don’t say. It’s interesting how many arguments against gay marriage were first used to defend state laws that barred mixed-race nuptials. Here’s one:</p>
<p>“We aren’t bigoted,” said the backers of anti-miscegenation laws. “We just worry, what will happen to the children? They’ll be taunted and teased.”</p>
<p>It’s like telling a shoe salesman that size matters. Minorities don’t need a heads-up on the possibilities of bigotry. Neither do gays and lesbians. It’s a truth that’s self-evident.</p>
<p>Follow the balloon. A nation is transfixed. What is it? What keeps it aloft? How high will it go? What if it crashes? What if there’s too much inflation or sudden deflation? What if rescuers can’t get there in time? What if there’s no way to bail out? Who built it? Who approved it? Who could think it would ever be safe?</p>
<p>But enough about the economy, how about that balloon boy?</p>
<p><strong>Smart Bombs is written by Associate Editor Gary Crooks and appears Wednesdays and Sundays on the Opinion page. Crooks can be reached at garyc@spokesman.com or at (509) 459-5026. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/18/ce-week-7-cute-kids-repulsive-politics-oct-18th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>41</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8220;Republican’s Vote Lifts a Health Bill, but Hurdles Remain&#8221;  Oct. 14th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/14/ce-week-6-republican%e2%80%99s-vote-lifts-a-health-bill-but-hurdles-remain-oct-14th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/14/ce-week-6-republican%e2%80%99s-vote-lifts-a-health-bill-but-hurdles-remain-oct-14th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 14 Oct 2009 13:48:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1094</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN
WASHINGTON — After months of relentless courting and suspense, Senator Olympia J. Snowe, Republican of Maine, cast her vote with Democrats on Tuesday as the Senate Finance Committee approved legislation to remake the health care system and provide coverage to millions of the uninsured.
With Ms. Snowe’s support, the committee [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — After months of relentless courting and suspense, Senator Olympia J. Snowe, Republican of Maine, cast her vote with Democrats on Tuesday as the Senate Finance Committee approved legislation to remake the health care system and provide coverage to millions of the uninsured.</p>
<p>With Ms. Snowe’s support, the committee backed the $829 billion measure on a vote of 14 to 9, with all the other Republicans opposed.</p>
<p>“Is this bill all that I would want?” Ms. Snowe said. “Far from it. Is it all that it can be? No. But when history calls, history calls. And I happen to think that the consequences of inaction dictate the urgency of Congress to take every opportunity to demonstrate its capacity to solve the monumental issues of our time.”</p>
<p>Ms. Snowe’s remarks silenced the packed committee room, riveted colleagues and thrilled the White House. President Obama had sought her vote, hoping that she would break with Republican leaders and provide at least a veneer of bipartisanship to the bill, which he has declared his top domestic priority.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama, speaking in the Rose Garden, described the committee’s action as “a critical milestone” and declared, “We are now closer than ever before to passing health reform.” But he added: “Now is not the time to pat ourselves on the back. Now is not the time to offer ourselves congratulations. Now is the time to dig in and work even harder to get this done.”</p>
<p>With its vote Tuesday, the Finance Committee became the fifth — and final — Congressional panel to approve a sweeping health care bill. The action will now move to the floors of the House and the Senate, where the health care measures still face significant hurdles.</p>
<p>Aside from Ms. Snowe, no Republicans in Congress have publicly endorsed the bills in their current form. And Republican leaders are strongly opposed, saying the bills cost too much, raise taxes, cut Medicare and dangerously expand federal power.</p>
<p>Pressure from lobbyists is sure to grow in the coming weeks. And many more lawmakers will get involved in what promise to be impassioned and highly politicized debates in the Senate and the House.</p>
<p>After the Finance Committee vote, the chief architect of the bill, Senator Max Baucus, Democrat of Montana and chairman of the committee, declared: “It’s clear that health care reform will pass this year. Our action today provides terrific momentum.”</p>
<p>Senator Charles E. Grassley of Iowa, the senior Republican on the Finance Committee, said the bill put the nation on “a slippery slope toward more and more government control of health care.”</p>
<p>Ms. Snowe helped write the Finance Committee bill, in months of bipartisan negotiations, but had not committed to vote for it. She said Tuesday that she shared many of her Republican colleagues’ reservations about the legislation, and pointedly warned Democrats that they could lose her support later in the legislative process.</p>
<p>“My vote today is my vote today,” she said. “It doesn’t forecast what my vote will be tomorrow.” And she observed, “There are many, many miles to go in this legislative journey.”</p>
<p>Ms. Snowe gave no clue how she would vote in the first few hours of committee deliberations Tuesday and she did not alert the White House to her plans.</p>
<p>While colleagues spoke, she kept her head buried in papers, fidgeted and spoke occasionally with aides. When Mr. Baucus stepped over to speak to her, a small army of photographers snapped pictures, with cameras clicking like a chorus of chirping crickets.</p>
<p>The Congressional Budget Office said the bill would cost $829 billion over 10 years. The costs include $345 billion for the expansion of Medicaid and $461 billion for subsidies to help lower-income people buy insurance.</p>
<p>The budget office said the costs would be completely offset by new fees and taxes and by cutbacks in Medicare, so federal budget deficits in the next 10 years would be $81 billion lower than now projected.</p>
<p>But Douglas W. Elmendorf, director of the Congressional Budget Office, said his agency had not estimated the impact of the bill on overall national health spending, public and private, and could not say whether it would “bend the cost curve,” as Mr. Obama and lawmakers want.</p>
<p>Likewise, Mr. Elmendorf said he did not know for sure how the bill would affect premiums.</p>
<p>Several senators said they would fight for changes on the Senate floor.</p>
<p>Liberal Democrats, like Senator John D. Rockefeller IV of West Virginia, said they would push for a public insurance plan. Senators Ron Wyden of Oregon and Robert Menendez of New Jersey, both Democrats, said they would seek changes to make insurance more affordable to middle-income families. And Senator John Kerry of Massachusetts said he wanted to require employers to provide insurance to their employees.</p>
<p>The bill does not include such an employer mandate. But employers with more than 50 workers would have to reimburse the government for some or all of the cost of federal subsidies provided to employees who buy insurance on their own.</p>
<p>Ms. Snowe said she liked the Finance Committee bill because it would prohibit insurance companies from discriminating against people on account of health status or sex and would create a network of insurance exchanges where individuals, families and small businesses could shop for coverage, with subsidies from the federal government.</p>
<p>At the same time, Ms. Snowe said she shared Republican “concerns about vast governmental bureaucracies and governmental intrusions.” That, she said, is why she had opposed amendments to create a government insurance plan and would continue to do so.</p>
<p>Ms. Snowe said she was open to a compromise under which a public plan could be “triggered” in states where people could not otherwise find affordable insurance. She said her “paramount concern” was that insurance might be too expensive for some people, even with government subsidies.</p>
<p>The Congressional Budget Office said the Finance Committee bill would provide coverage to 29 million people, but still leave 25 million uninsured in 2019. Of those left uncovered, about a third would be illegal immigrants.</p>
<p>David Stout contributed reporting.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/14/ce-week-6-republican%e2%80%99s-vote-lifts-a-health-bill-but-hurdles-remain-oct-14th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8220;Unconstitutional isn’t necessarily wrong&#8221;  Oct. 12th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/12/ce-week-6-unconstitutional-isn%e2%80%99t-necessarily-wrong-oct-12th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/12/ce-week-6-unconstitutional-isn%e2%80%99t-necessarily-wrong-oct-12th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 13 Oct 2009 04:45:33 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Religion]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1090</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Leonard Pitts Jr.
Christmas is probably unconstitutional.
I’m no lawyer, but the logic seems unassailable to me. Consider: Santa Claus aside, Christmas is an explicitly Christian holiday and the only holiday of any religion to be observed by the federal government. Which would seem to violate the First Amendment edict that Congress “shall make no law [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by Leonard Pitts Jr.</p>
<p>Christmas is probably unconstitutional.</strong></p>
<p>I’m no lawyer, but the logic seems unassailable to me. Consider: Santa Claus aside, Christmas is an explicitly Christian holiday and the only holiday of any religion to be observed by the federal government. Which would seem to violate the <strong>First Amendment edict that Congress “shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion.”</strong> Yet to the best of my admittedly limited knowledge, no one has ever sued Christmas before the Supreme Court.</p>
<p>Not that I’m trying to give any ideas. No, I’m only trying to tease out an opinion I can live with in a case the court heard last week, about a cross in the Mojave Desert.</p>
<p>The original cross (it has been replaced a number of times over the years) was erected in 1934 as a tribute to the dead of World War I and sits in a remote corner of what is now the Mojave National Preserve. Its legal troubles began 10 years ago with a former employee of the National Park Service who sued because he thought the cross an improper display on federal land in that it celebrated one faith over others.</p>
<p>It’s a contention Justice Antonin Scalia sharply disputed last week. “It’s erected as a war memorial,” he said. “I assume it is erected in honor of all the war dead.”</p>
<p>To which Peter Eliasberg, a lawyer representing the American Civil Liberties Union, shot back: “I have been in Jewish cemeteries. There is never a cross on a tombstone of a Jew.”</p>
<p>Scalia was unconvinced: “I don’t think you can leap from that to the conclusion that the only war dead that the cross honors are the Christian war dead. I think that’s an outrageous conclusion.”</p>
<p>But Eliasberg’s conclusion was, of course, perfectly valid, and Scalia’s obstinate insistence that the cross is a generic symbol manages to simultaneously demean Christianity and deftly illustrate the sort of bullying the Constitution discourages. How easily and readily the majority embraces the myopic view that its symbols and norms represent us all.</p>
<p>That said, I keep wondering what good can come of this.</p>
<p>The plaintiff is said to be a devout Catholic, so we can take it on – ahem – faith that he is motivated solely by principle. For the record, the principle is one I support.</p>
<p>You need only look at Iran to know the separation of church and state is a good thing. <strong>You do not post the Ten Commandments in court for the same reason you do not mandate prayer in schools or require Bible study to get a job: There is a coercive effect that is wholly unfair to those of other faiths or no faith at all.</strong></p>
<p>But I have trouble seeing the coercive effect of a cross in the middle of nowhere.</p>
<p>I submit that this is a battle poorly chosen. Yes, the argument arguably has legal merit, but you have to ask yourself: What’s the point? Is someone really injured by a cross in the desert? Or is this not about validating principle at all costs – even public peace and common sense?</p>
<p>Indeed, by the same reasoning, one might sue cities that allow crosses to be planted at roadsides where traffic fatalities have occurred. Except that if it comforts some grieving family and your only “injury” is to glimpse it while driving by at 65 mph, why would you bother? Principle absent human compassion is just intellectual masturbation.</p>
<p>So forgive me if I am unimpressed by the argument that a cross in the middle of nowhere is unconstitutional. Understand: I think the argument may well be correct.</p>
<p>But that’s not the same as being right.<br />
<strong><br />
Leonard Pitts Jr. is a columnist for the Miami Herald. His e-mail address is lpitts@miamiherald.com.</strong> </p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/12/ce-week-6-unconstitutional-isn%e2%80%99t-necessarily-wrong-oct-12th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8220;Prop 4 supporters, opponents make cases&#8221;  Oct. 11th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/11/ce-week-6-prop-4-supporters-opponents-make-cases-oct-11th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/11/ce-week-6-prop-4-supporters-opponents-make-cases-oct-11th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 11 Oct 2009 15:06:02 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1086</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Point by point arguments on proposed community bill of rights
by Jonathan Brunt / jonathanb@spokesman.com, (509) 459-5442
Proposition 4 is the most debated and argued, hated and loved, vilified and oversimplified question on November’s ballot.
Supporters say the Community Bill of Rights – Proposition 4 on ballots that will be mailed later this week to voters in the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Point by point arguments on proposed community bill of rights<br />
by Jonathan Brunt / jonathanb@spokesman.com, (509) 459-5442</strong></p>
<p>Proposition 4 is the most debated and argued, hated and loved, vilified and oversimplified question on November’s ballot.</p>
<p>Supporters say the Community Bill of Rights – Proposition 4 on ballots that will be mailed later this week to voters in the city of Spokane – is an attempt to empower citizens to improve the environment, ensure housing and basic preventive health care, give neighborhoods a say in development projects and create an economy that has good jobs.</p>
<p>Opponents say the proposed amendments to the City Charter were written in a way to ensure constant lawsuits that will more likely halt progress on the goals listed in the proposition and will drive businesses and jobs from the city of Spokane to Spokane Valley or elsewhere.</p>
<p>Below is the wording from each of the nine rights in the Community Bill of Rights and statements from a debate at The Spokesman-Review this week:</p>
<p>Kai Huschke, the campaign manager for Envision Spokane, the group that successfully placed the proposal on the ballot.</p>
<p>Kate McCaslin, a former Spokane County commissioner, representing Jobs &#038; Opportunities Benefiting Spokane, a group formed to oppose the measure.</p>
<p><strong>Right 1</p>
<p>Residents have the right to a locally based economy to ensure local job creation and enhance local business opportunities. The right shall include the right to have local monies reinvested locally by lending institutions, and the right to equal access to capital, credit, contracts, incentives, and services for businesses owned by Spokane residents.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>The first amendment is about keeping money earned in Spokane in Spokane, Huschke said. That means requiring banks to use money from residents and businesses within city limits only on investments within the city of Spokane.</p>
<p>“If we are going to have a vibrant economy, we have to enhance our local economy,” Huschke said. “In order to do that, we have to make sure that we are treating our local businesses as best we can.”</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said working for a locally based economy is positive, but not through a banking regulation that would create vast accounting headaches and likely lawsuits for lending institutions.</p>
<p>“This basically says people could sue the bank if they felt like those moneys were going outside Spokane,” McCaslin said, adding that banks might simply move outside city limits. “That will cost us jobs.”</p>
<p><strong>Right 2</p>
<p>Residents have the right to affordable preventive health care. For residents otherwise unable to access such care, the City shall guarantee such access by coordinating with area health care providers to create affordable fee-for-service programs within 18 months following adoption of this Charter provision.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke said the city’s only duty under this provision is to convene a group of health care providers and to make a good-faith attempt to create the program.</p>
<p>“There is no cost to the city, plain and simple,” he said.</p>
<p>That’s because any administrative costs that might be created if health care providers successfully create a fee-for-service plan would be paid for by the fees, he said. Because most people who are uninsured have a source of income, fees could be charged to cover costs, he said.</p>
<p>“It was very, very critical to the people who formulated this that we didn’t build it such that there would be a cost to taxpayers,” Huschke said.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin argues that the provision could easily be interpreted to mean that the city’s on the hook to provide preventive health care – whether or not the group of health care providers successfully creates the program.</p>
<p>And if a program is created, she said, there’s too much ambiguity about what’s required.</p>
<p>“Maybe what’s affordable to me is way different than what’s affordable to my neighbor, which is way different than is affordable to the neighbor down the street.”</p>
<p>She questioned who would pay for fees charged to patients who couldn’t afford them.</p>
<p><strong>Right 3</p>
<p>Residents have the right to affordable housing, the right to a safely maintained dwelling, and the right to be free from housing discrimination. The City shall ensure the availability of low-income housing stock sufficient to meet the needs of the low-income housing community. People and families may only be denied renting or buying of a dwelling for non-discriminatory reasons and may only be evicted from their residence for non-discriminatory causes.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke said the provision could be met by the creation of regulations or incentives so that future housing developments include a certain percentage of low-income housing.</p>
<p>“It’s not about building houses; it’s about making sure that the stock of development is sufficient for the low-income community,” he said.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said if regulations or incentives fail to create enough low-income housing, the city could be forced into financing construction because it says the city “shall ensure the availability” of housing.</p>
<p>“These words are very specific,” she said. “The city could be on the hook for a lot of money.”</p>
<p><strong>Right 4</p>
<p>Residents have the right to access affordable and renewable energy sources.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>“This would give residents the ability to actually generate their own energy if need be as well as to make sure that energy access stays affordable and renewable for the citizens of Spokane,” Huschke said. “If we’re going to play our part on a community level we need to have the ability to access renewable energy sources.”</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said the rule likely would result in endless lawsuits.</p>
<p>“I just think that this is so open to interpretation that we are going to spend years and years and years trying to figure out what it means at great cost,” McCaslin said.</p>
<p><strong>Right 5</p>
<p>Ecosystems, including but not limited to, all groundwater systems, surface water systems and aquifers, have the right to exist and flourish. River systems have the right to flow and have water quality necessary to provide habitat for native plants and animals, and to provide clean drinking water. Aquifers have the right to sustainable recharge, flow and water quality.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke said current environmental laws are “not giving us the level of protections we need.”</p>
<p>He noted studies that indicate that summertime flow of the Spokane River has fallen significantly in the past century – a development that puts strain on fish populations.</p>
<p>“This ups greater protections both from the pollution standpoint and from the flow standpoint,” he said.</p>
<p>As current law stands, a person concerned about an environmental problem often needs to have a financial interest in order to file a lawsuit, Huschke said.</p>
<p>This provision would do away with that requirement and make it possible for anyone to bring a suit.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said great improvements to the river and environment have occurred with current regulations and by “people working together.”</p>
<p>“We will all admit there are major issues that we need to address with our river and keep moving forward, but this is not the way to do and, in fact, could bring all of those efforts to a standstill,” McCaslin said.</p>
<p>McCaslin questioned the ability, as defined in the Ninth Amendment, allowing “anyone” to file a challenge.</p>
<p>“It really opens up the potential for vast amounts of litigation because you really don’t have to prove any standing, you just have to be a human to bring a lawsuit.”</p>
<p><strong>Right 6</p>
<p>Residents have the right, through their neighborhood councils, to determine the future of their neighborhoods, which shall include the right to adopt enforceable neighborhood plans, and the right to have growth-related public infrastructure costs funded by new development as provided by an impact fees Ordinance. The City of Spokane shall provide sufficient funding to neighborhood councils for the creation, adoption and enforcement of neighborhood plans. Such plans shall respect and promote the rights delineated by this Charter. Residents may also determine the future of their neighborhoods by rejecting proposed land development projects, in accordance with the provisions of this Charter.</p>
<p>Those provisions include:</p>
<p>A neighborhood council may veto a land development project if requested to veto that project by a number of neighborhood registered voters equal to or greater than 15 percent of the total number of votes cast at the last preceding general municipal election within that neighborhood.  … A neighborhood council shall veto a land development project if requested to veto that project by a number of neighborhood registered voters greater than 50 percent of the total number of votes cast at the last preceding general municipal election within that neighborhood.  …</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke noted that the city already has funded creation of some neighborhood plans, which become part of the city’s comprehensive plan – the city’s long-term growth guide. Continuing those efforts simply puts the city on a path of following through on promises officials made several years ago to craft development plans based on neighborhood input, supporters say.</p>
<p>Some neighborhood leaders have argued that developers’ vast resources and campaign contributions to City Council members unfairly tilt the process in their favor even if rules and zoning don’t favor their proposals. In development controversies in Spokane County, opponents have noted that even when neighbors successfully sued Spokane County for inappropriately approving development, the contested projects were vested under state law and were allowed to move forward even when deemed to have been illegally approved.</p>
<p>“Right now we don’t have the ability to actually uphold our plans on a neighborhood level. This is actually about empowering the residents to be able to do so,” Huschke said. “Until we as residents have the ability to actually call that into question through a legal manner we won’t have the ability to protect the integrity of our neighborhoods as we should.”</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said if a law is approved requiring neighborhood planning, the cost to provide those services will pull from some other city priorities.</p>
<p>Most of the city’s funding for neighborhood plans thus far was paid for with surpluses experienced by the city before the recent recession.</p>
<p>“The point is that in a year like this, it could mean a decision between funding a police officer or a planning staff member,” McCaslin said.</p>
<p>McCaslin said provisions empowering neighborhood councils to veto a development project take away authority from leaders chosen by secret ballot in certified elections.</p>
<p>“We depend upon people who are formally elected through a process that we can trust,” McCaslin said. “It’s not just who shows up at a meeting one night and happens to get elected.”</p>
<p>She noted that the proposal is based on the number of voters who participated in the most recent city election. If turnout was closer to 30 percent, it would only take about 200 signatures in a neighborhood with 4,000 registered voters to give the neighborhood council veto power.</p>
<p>Opponents note that once a neighborhood council would veto a project it’s dead because there’s no provision to reverse course even if a majority of residents in the neighborhood sign a petition in support of the development.</p>
<p><strong>Right 7</p>
<p>Workers have the right to be paid the prevailing wage on all private construction projects exceeding $2 million in construction costs (as annually adjusted for inflation), and all public and publicly subsidized construction projects, within the City of Spokane. Workers have the right to work as apprentices on all private construction projects exceeding $2 million in construction costs (as annually adjusted for inflation), and all public and publicly subsidized construction projects, through programs approved under the Washington State Apprenticeship Training Program, and each contractor and subcontractor building those projects shall be required to use apprentices for a minimum of 15 percent of the total hours worked on each project.<br />
</strong><br />
Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke said the rules are about “pay equity” and giving people opportunities to learn skills. They also would result in a better work force, one that is “more loyal, one that has less injuries,” he said.</p>
<p>“If you don’t give them opportunities to actually access jobs … in an apprentice program, you’re actually losing jobs because you don’t have the skill sets we need,” Huschke said.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said the rules will raise the cost of private construction, perhaps by 20 percent or more. That means, she said, jobs will be lost because some projects won’t move forward, at least not in the city of Spokane.</p>
<p>“I’ll tell you where they’re going to go and it’s not going to be in the city. Jobs will be lost. Property taxes in the future will be lost, and it will end up to be a great detriment to the city.”</p>
<p><strong>Right 8</p>
<p>Workers have the right to employer neutrality when unionizing, and the right to be free from captive audience meetings, or other mandatory, non-work-related meetings, in the workplace.</strong></p>
<p>Supporters</p>
<p>Union leaders have argued that federal law is slanted against unionization because of intimidation from employers, sometimes at “captive-audience” meetings where managers dissuade creation of a labor group.</p>
<p>Huschke said this rule would create an equal playing field.</p>
<p>“It doesn’t mean that employers can’t give their opinion, but they can’t block people from discussing the possibility of unionizing,” he said.</p>
<p>He added that employers could still hold meetings as long as employees aren’t punished for not attending.</p>
<p>“This is about having a freedom of choice,” he said.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin argues that workers’ unionizing rights already are protected under federal law. Envision Spokane’s proposal, she said, would strip employer rights from the process.</p>
<p>“Employers would no longer have that option of talking about why their employees may not want to consider a union, and that is just unfair,” she said. “This alone will cost hundreds, if not thousands of jobs, in the city of Spokane as employers say, ‘You know what? I put everything at risk to have my small business. I do not think it is fair that I should not be able to talk to my employees about these issues,’ and they will simply leave.”</p>
<p><strong>Right 9</p>
<p>All rights recognized by the Community Bill of Rights are fundamental, inalienable and self-executing. The City of Spokane, or any person, neighborhood, or neighborhood council aggrieved by a violation of their rights, or any person seeking to enforce the rights of ecosystems, may enforce these rights. Enforcement actions shall be filed as civil actions in a court of competent jurisdiction, against any person, government or entity violating these rights, and sufficient legal and equitable relief shall be awarded to remedy the violation, including restoration of a damaged ecosystem. In any action to enforce any Charter right, the court may allow the prevailing plaintiff a reasonable attorney’s fee and expert fees. Corporations and other business entities shall not be deemed to possess any legal rights, privileges, powers or protections which would enable those entities to avoid the enforcement of these rights, or which would enable them to nullify these rights.  …<br />
</strong><br />
Supporters</p>
<p>Huschke said, in part, the amendment aims to prevent corporations from overpowering the rights of citizens through power and wealth.</p>
<p>He agreed that rights could mean some businesses would leave the city, but those likely would be big-box stores that pay low wages, he said. Locally owned establishments would replace what leaves.</p>
<p>“If you want to continue to bring outside businesses to settle in here, yeah, those jobs are going to be gone, but they’re going to be replaced by a lot better jobs,” he said.</p>
<p>Opponents</p>
<p>McCaslin said it’s easy to vilify big corporations, but small businesses make up the bulk of the local economy and they too would be challenged by the rules and be just as likely to flee Spokane.</p>
<p>“If a community has a regulation that strips you of your rights, why would you ever be here?” she said. “It really undermines our business climate here, our ability to recruit business and frankly our ability to keep businesses here.”</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/11/ce-week-6-prop-4-supporters-opponents-make-cases-oct-11th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8220;Surprise Nobel for Obama Stirs Praise and Doubts&#8221;  Oct. 10th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/10/ce-week-6-surprise-nobel-for-obama-stirs-praise-and-doubts-oct-10th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/10/ce-week-6-surprise-nobel-for-obama-stirs-praise-and-doubts-oct-10th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sat, 10 Oct 2009 15:20:53 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1081</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[October 10, 2009
By STEVEN ERLANGER and SHERYL GAY STOLBERG
PARIS — The choice of Barack Obama on Friday as the recipient of the 2009 Nobel Peace Prize, less than nine months into his eventful presidency, was an unexpected honor that elicited praise and puzzlement around the globe.
Normally the prize has been presented, even controversially, for accomplishment. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>October 10, 2009</p>
<p>By STEVEN ERLANGER and SHERYL GAY STOLBERG</strong></p>
<p>PARIS — The choice of Barack Obama on Friday as the recipient of the 2009 Nobel Peace Prize, less than nine months into his eventful presidency, was an unexpected honor that elicited praise and puzzlement around the globe.</p>
<p>Normally the prize has been presented, even controversially, for accomplishment. This prize, to a 48-year-old freshman president, for “extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples,” seemed a kind of prayer and encouragement by the Nobel committee for future endeavor and more consensual American leadership.</p>
<p>But the prize quickly loomed as a potential political liability — perhaps more burden than glory — for Mr. Obama. Republicans contended that he had won more for his star power and oratorical skills than for his actual achievements, and even some Democrats privately questioned whether he deserved it.</p>
<p>The Nobel committee’s embrace of Mr. Obama was viewed as a rejection of the unpopular tenure, in Europe especially, of his predecessor, George W. Bush.</p>
<p>But the committee, based in Norway, stressed that it made its decision based on Mr. Obama’s actual efforts toward nuclear disarmament as well as American engagement with the world relying more on diplomacy and dialogue.</p>
<p>“The question we have to ask is who has done the most in the previous year to enhance peace in the world,” the Nobel committee chairman, Thorbjorn Jagland, said in Oslo after the announcement. “And who has done more than Barack Obama?”</p>
<p>Still, Mr. Obama, who was described as “very surprised” when he received the news, said he himself was not quite convinced, adding that the award “deeply humbled” him.</p>
<p>“To be honest,” the president said in the Rose Garden, “I do not feel that I deserve to be in the company of so many of the transformative figures who have been honored by this prize, men and women who’ve inspired me and inspired the entire world through their courageous pursuit of peace.”</p>
<p>He said, though, that he would “accept this award as a call to action, a call for all nations to confront the challenges of the 21st century.” Mr. Obama plans to travel to Oslo to accept the award on Dec. 10. He will donate the prize money of $1.4 million to charity, the White House said.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama, only the third sitting American president to win the award, is suddenly put in the company of world leaders like Mikhail S. Gorbachev, who won for helping end the cold war, and Nelson Mandela, who sought an end to apartheid.</p>
<p>But less prominent figures have also won the award.</p>
<p>The reaction inside the administration was one of restraint, perhaps reflecting the awkwardness of winning a major prize amid a worldwide debate about whether it was deserved.</p>
<p>Republicans in Washington, reacting in disbelief, sought to portray Mr. Obama as unworthy. In an official statement, Michael Steele, chairman of the Republican National Committee, said, “The real question Americans are asking is, ‘What has President Obama actually accomplished?’ “</p>
<p>But there was much praise as well, even if Mr. Obama’s allies worried that the prize might be a liability and even if much of the praise came from Europe, giving ammunition to conservatives who say Mr. Obama cares too much about opinion there.</p>
<p>President Nicolas Sarkozy of France said the award marked “America’s return to the hearts of the world’s peoples,” while Chancellor Angela Merkel of Germany said it was an “incentive to the president and to us all” to do more for peace.</p>
<p>“In a short time he has been able to set a new tone throughout the world and to create a readiness for dialogue,” she said.</p>
<p>For a world that at times felt pushed around by a more unilateralist Bush administration, the prize for Mr. Obama seemed wrapped in gratitude for his willingness to listen and negotiate, as well as for his positions on climate change and nuclear disarmament.</p>
<p>Last year’s laureate, former President Martti Ahtisaari of Finland, saw the award as an endorsement of Mr. Obama’s goal of achieving Middle East peace.</p>
<p>“Of course, this puts pressure on Obama,” he said. “The world expects that he will also achieve something.”</p>
<p>The prize, announced as official Washington — including the president — was asleep, caught the White House off guard.</p>
<p>The first word of it came in the form of an e-mail message to the White House staff from the White House Situation Room, which monitors events worldwide around the clock, at 5:09 a.m. It carried the subject line “item of interest.”</p>
<p>Shortly before 6 a.m., the White House press secretary, Robert Gibbs, telephoned Mr. Obama, awakening him to share the news.</p>
<p>“There has been no discussion, nothing at all,” said the White House chief of staff, Rahm Emanuel.</p>
<p>The award comes at a time of considerable challenges for the president, with few sweeping achievements so far.</p>
<p>On the domestic front, he is pressing Congress to overhaul the nation’s health care system. In foreign affairs, he is wrestling with his advisers over how to chart a new course in Afghanistan and has been working, with little movement, to restart peace talks between Israelis and Palestinians.</p>
<p>The Rose Garden appearance was an example of Mr. Obama’s heavy workload; it was squeezed into a day that already included his regular intelligence and economic briefings, a private meeting with a senator, lunch with the vice president, a major speech outlining plans for a new consumer protection agency and a strategy session on Afghanistan with his national security team.</p>
<p>Announcing the award, the Nobel committee cited Mr. Obama “for his extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples” and said that he had “created a new climate in international politics.”</p>
<p>In a four-paragraph statement, it praised Mr. Obama for his tone, his preference for negotiation and multilateral diplomacy and his vision of a cooperative world of shared values, shorn of nuclear weapons.</p>
<p>“Only very rarely has a person to the same extent as Obama captured the world’s attention and given its people hope for a better future,” the committee said. “His diplomacy is founded in the concept that those who are to lead the world must do so on the basis of values and attitudes that are shared by the majority of the world’s population.”</p>
<p>The other sitting American presidents to be given the award were Theodore Roosevelt in 1906, for negotiating an end to a war between Russia and Japan, and Woodrow Wilson in 1919, for the Treaty of Versailles.</p>
<p>Former President Jimmy Carter won in 2002 for his efforts over decades to spread peace and development. Mr. Carter called the award to Mr. Obama “a bold statement of international support for his vision and commitment.”</p>
<p>Former Vice President Al Gore won in 2007, sharing the prize with the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, for his work on climate change. Mr. Gore called Mr. Obama’s award “well deserved” on Friday.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama has generated considerable goodwill overseas, with polls showing him hugely popular, and he has made a series of speeches with arching ambition. He has vowed to pursue a world without nuclear weapons; reached out to the Muslim world, delivering a major speech in Cairo in June; and sought to restart peace talks between Israel and the Palestinians, at the expense of offending some of his Jewish supporters.</p>
<p>But he has had to devote a great deal of his time to the economic crisis and other domestic issues, and many of his policy efforts are only beginning.</p>
<p>In addition to the challenges in Afghanistan and Pakistan, the situation in Iraq is extremely fragile; North Korea has staged missile tests; Iran continues to enrich uranium in defiance of United Nations Security Council resolutions, though it recently agreed to restart nuclear talks; Israel has resisted a settlement freeze; and Saudi Arabia has refused to make new gestures toward the Israelis.</p>
<p>Ahmed Youssef, a Hamas spokesman, congratulated Mr. Obama but said the prize was based only on good intentions. Muhammad al-Sharif, a politically independent Gazan, was incredulous. “Has Israel stopped building the settlements?” he asked. “Has Obama achieved a Palestinian state yet?”</p>
<p>The Nobel committee did not tell Mr. Obama in advance of the announcement, said its chairman, Mr. Jagland. “Waking up a president in the middle of the night,” he said, “this isn’t really something you do.”<br />
<strong><br />
Steven Erlanger reported from Paris, and Sheryl Gay Stolberg from Washington. Reporting was contributed by Walter Gibbs from Oslo, Alan Cowell from London, Nicholas Kulish from Berlin, Isabel Kershner from Jerusalem, and Taghreed El-Khodary from Gaza.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/10/ce-week-6-surprise-nobel-for-obama-stirs-praise-and-doubts-oct-10th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>11</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8220;In Surprise, Nobel Peace Prize to Obama for Diplomacy&#8221;  Oct. 10th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/09/ce-week-6-in-surprise-nobel-peace-prize-to-obama-for-diplomacy/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/09/ce-week-6-in-surprise-nobel-peace-prize-to-obama-for-diplomacy/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 09 Oct 2009 15:41:26 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1077</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[October 10, 2009
By WALTER GIBBS and SHERYL GAY STOLBERG
OSLO — President Obama was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize on Friday for his “extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples,” a stunning honor that came less than nine months after Mr. Obama made United States history by becoming the country’s first African-American president.
The [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>October 10, 2009</p>
<p>By WALTER GIBBS and SHERYL GAY STOLBERG</strong></p>
<p>OSLO — President Obama was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize on Friday for his “<strong>extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples</strong>,” a stunning honor that came less than nine months after Mr. Obama made United States history by becoming the country’s first African-American president.</p>
<p>The award, announced here by the Nobel Committee while much of official Washington — including the president — was still asleep, cited in particular the president’s efforts to rid the world of nuclear weapons.</p>
<p>“He has created a new international climate,” the committee said.</p>
<p>For Mr. Obama, one of the nation’s youngest presidents, the award is an extraordinary recognition that puts him in the company of world leaders such as Mikhail Gorbachev, who won for helping to bring an end to the cold war, and Nelson Mandela, who sought an end to apartheid. But it is also a potential political liability at home; already, Republicans are criticizing the president, contending he won more for his “star power” than his actual achievements.</p>
<p>The news shocked people in Oslo — where an audible gasp escaped the audience when the decision was announced — and in Washington, where top advisers to Mr. Obama said they had no idea it was coming. The president was awakened shortly before 6 a.m. by his press secretary, Robert Gibbs, who delivered the news. Mr. Obama himself was to appear in the Rose Garden this morning to discuss the announcement.</p>
<p>“There has been no discussion, nothing at all,” said Rahm Emanuel, the president’s chief of staff, in a brief early morning telephone interview.</p>
<p>Mr. Emanuel said at the time that he had not yet spoken directly to the president. A senior administration official said in an e-mail message that “the president was humbled to be selected by the committee,” without adding anything further.</p>
<p>In one sense, the award was a rebuke to the foreign policies of Mr. Obama’s predecessor, George W. Bush, some of which the president has sought to overturn. Mr. Obama made repairing the fractured relations between the United States and the rest of the world a major theme of his campaign for the presidency. Since taking office as president he has pursued a range of policies intended to fulfill that goal. He has vowed to pursue a world without nuclear weapons, as he did in a speech in Prague earlier this year; reached out to the Muslim world, delivering a major speech in Cairo in June; and sought to restart peace talks between Israel and the Palestinians.</p>
<p>“<strong>Only very rarely has a person to the same extent as Obama captured the world’s attention and given its people hope for a better future</strong>,” the committee said in its citation. “<strong>His diplomacy is founded in the concept that those who are to lead the world must do so on the basis of values and attitudes that are shared by the majority of the world’s population.”</strong></p>
<p>But while Mr. Obama has generated considerable good will overseas — his foreign counterparts are eager to meet with him, and polls show he is hugely popular around the world — many of his policy efforts have yet to bear fruit, or are only just beginning to do so. North Korea has defied him with missile tests; Iran, however, recently agreed to restart nuclear talks, which Mr. Obama has called “a constructive beginning.”</p>
<p>In that sense, Mr. Obama is unlike past recipients of the Nobel Peace Prize such as former President Jimmy Carter, who won in 2002 for what presenters cited as decades of “untiring efforts” to seek peaceful end to international conflicts. (Mr. Carter failed to win in 1978, as some had expected, after he brokered a historic peace deal between Israel and Egypt.)</p>
<p>Thorbjorn Jagland, the chairman of the Norwegian Nobel Committee and a former prime minister of Norway, said the president had already contributed enough to world diplomacy and international understanding to earn the award.</p>
<p>“We are not awarding the prize for what may happen in the future, but for what he has done in the previous year,” Mr. Jagland said. “We would hope this will enhance what he is trying to do.” The prize comes as Mr. Obama faces considerable challenges at home. On the domestic front, he is trying to press Congress to pass major legislation overhauling the nation’s health care system. On the foreign policy front, he is wrestling with declining support in his own party for the war in Afghanistan. The White House is engaged in an internal debate over whether to send more troops there, as Mr. Obama’s commanding general has requested.</p>
<p>For Mr. Obama, the award could, in a strange way, prove a political liability. As he traveled overseas during his campaign for the presidency, he was subjected to criticism from Republicans who argued he was too much the international celebrity. Winning the Nobel at such an early stage in his presidency could further that kind of criticism, especially in Washington’s hyperpartisan political environment.</p>
<p>Even before Mr. Obama appeared in the Rose Garden to discuss the award, he was facing criticism from the chairman of the Republican National Committee, Michael Steele.</p>
<p>“The real question Americans are asking is, ‘<strong>What has President Obama actually accomplished?</strong>’ It is unfortunate that the president’s star power has outshined tireless advocates who have made real achievements working towards peace and human rights,” Mr. Steele said in a statement. “One thing is certain — President Obama won’t be receiving any awards from Americans for job creation, fiscal responsibility, or backing up rhetoric with concrete action.”</p>
<p>Mr. Obama also suffered a rejection on the world stage when he traveled to Copenhagen only last Friday to press the United States’ unsuccessful bid to host the Olympics in Chicago. Mr. Emanuel, who heard the news at 5 a.m. when he was heading out for his morning swim, said he joked to his wife, “Oslo beats Copenhagen.”</p>
<p>But rebuffs have been rare for Mr. Obama as he has traveled the world these past nine months — from Africa to Europe, Latin America and the Middle East, with a trip to Asia planned for November.</p>
<p>In April, just hours after North Korea tested a ballistic missile in defiance of international sanctions, he told a huge crowd in Prague that he was committed to “a world without nuclear weapons.”</p>
<p>In June, he traveled to Cairo, fulfilling a campaign pledge to deliver a speech in a major Muslim capital. There, in a speech that was interrupted with shouts of, “We love you!” from the crowd, Mr. Obama said he sought a “new beginning” and a “fresh relationship” based on mutual understanding and respect.</p>
<p>“I am convinced that in order to move forward, we must say openly the things we hold in our hearts, and that too often are said only behind closed doors,” the president said then. “There must be a sustained effort to listen to each other, to learn from each other, to respect one another, to seek common ground.”</p>
<p>Mr. Obama’s foreign policy has been criticized bitterly among neoconservatives like former Vice President Dick Cheney, who have suggested his rhetoric is naïve and his inclination to talk to America’s enemies will leave the United States vulnerable to another terrorist attack.</p>
<p>In its announcement of the prize, the Nobel Committee seemed to directly refute that line of thinking.</p>
<p>“<strong>Obama has as president created a new climate in international politics,</strong>” <strong>the committee wrote. “Multilateral diplomacy has regained a central position, with emphasis on the role that the United Nations and other international institutions can play.</strong>”</p>
<p>Interviewed later in the Nobel Committee’s wood-paneled meeting room, surrounded by photographs of past winners, Mr. Jagland brushed aside concerns expressed by some critics that Mr. Obama remains untested.</p>
<p>“The question we have to ask is who has done the most in the previous year to enhance peace in the world,” Mr. Jagland said. “And who has done more than Barack Obama?”</p>
<p>He compared the selection of Mr. Obama with the award in 1971 to the then West German Chancellor Willy Brandt for his “Ostpolitik” policy of reconciliation with communist eastern Europe.</p>
<p>“Brandt hadn’t achieved much when he got the prize, but a process had started that ended with the fall of the Berlin Wall,” said Mr. Jagland. “The same thing is true of the prize to Mikhail Gorbachev in 1990, for launching perestroika. One can say that Barack Obama is trying to change the world, just as those two personalities changed Europe.”</p>
<p>“We have to get the world on the right track again,” he said. Without referring specifically to the Bush era, he continued: “Look at the level of confrontation we had just a few years ago. Now we get a man who is not only willing but probably able to open dialogue and strengthen international institutions.”</p>
<p>President Obama is the third leading American Democrat to win the prize this decade, following former Vice President Al Gore in 2007 along with the United Nations climate panel and former President Jimmy Carter in 2002.</p>
<p>The last sitting American president to win the prize was Woodrow Wilson in 1919. Theodore Roosevelt was selected in 1906 while in the White House and Mr. Carter more than 20 years after he left office.</p>
<p>The prize was won last year by the former president of Finland, Martti Ahtisaari for peace efforts in Africa and the Balkans.</p>
<p>The prize is worth the equivalent of $1.4 million and is to be awarded in Oslo on Dec. 10.</p>
<p>The full citation read: “<strong>The Norwegian Nobel Committee has decided that the Nobel Peace Prize for 2009 is to be awarded to President Barack Obama for his extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples. The Committee has attached special importance to Obama’s vision of and work for a world without nuclear weapons.</strong></p>
<p>“<strong>Obama has as President created a new climate in international politics. Multilateral diplomacy has regained a central position, with emphasis on the role that the United Nations and other international institutions can play. Dialogue and negotiations are preferred as instruments for resolving even the most difficult international conflicts. The vision of a world free from nuclear arms has powerfully stimulated disarmament and arms control negotiations. Thanks to Obama’s initiative, the United States is now playing a more constructive role in meeting the great climatic challenges the world is confronting. Democracy and human rights are to be strengthened.</strong>”<br />
<strong><br />
Walter Gibbs reported from Oslo and Sheryl Gay Stolberg from Washington. Alan Cowell contributed reporting from London, and Richard Berry from Paris.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/09/ce-week-6-in-surprise-nobel-peace-prize-to-obama-for-diplomacy/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>8</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #6:  &#8221; US must seize climate-change opportunity&#8221;  Oct. 7th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/08/ce-week-6-us-must-seize-climate-change-opportunity/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/08/ce-week-6-us-must-seize-climate-change-opportunity/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 08 Oct 2009 14:12:45 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1075</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[By Chris Jordan
October 7, 2009
Prepare yourself for the shocker of the century…
I am not a fan of George W. Bush.
I know what you’re thinking: Oh, how original. But first, let me explain.
One of the things I remember most vividly about the Bush years was feeling like the United States’ global influence was fading rapidly. We [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>By Chris Jordan<br />
October 7, 2009</strong></p>
<p>Prepare yourself for the shocker of the century…</p>
<p>I am not a fan of George W. Bush.</p>
<p>I know what you’re thinking: Oh, how original. But first, let me explain.</p>
<p>One of the things I remember most vividly about the Bush years was feeling like the United States’ global influence was fading rapidly. We were becoming the hated bully of the world.</p>
<p>Instead of building partnerships and working with our allies, we were essentially alone. Instead of displaying leadership on pressing global issues like climate change, we were constantly at odds with the world.</p>
<p>So far, President Obama has put us on a good path towards progress. He has re-engaged with allies, reached out to Muslims around the world, and made real progress on nuclear arms control.</p>
<p>But the greatest challenge is yet to come. Forging a new global framework for climate-change mitigation will be the goal of the upcoming U.N. Climate Conference in Copenhagen, Denmark.</p>
<p>The Kyoto Protocol is the existing treaty aimed at global greenhouse gas reductions, and it was signed and ratified by every nation on Earth with the exceptions of Iraq, Afghanistan, Somalia, the United States and a tiny handful of others. It is set to expire in 2012. This Copenhagen Conference, set to occur in December, is the next step for humanity in dealing with climate change.</p>
<p>British Prime Minister Gordon Brown recently warned that, “the [Copenhagen] negotiations are proceeding so slowly that a deal is in grave danger.”</p>
<p>Part of the reason behind this stall is the political situation in Washington, D.C.</p>
<p>While world leaders had planned to build on the framework of Kyoto for the new agreement, the United States wants to weaken and change the treaty so it might have a shot at ratification in the U.S. Senate.</p>
<p>According to The Guardian, European leaders worry, “it could take several years to negotiate a replacement framework.”</p>
<p>So why is the Obama administration so uncomfortable with the old Kyoto Protocol?</p>
<p>First of all, in 1997 the Senate passed a bill 95-0 that stated that the United States should not be a signatory to any protocol that did not include binding targets and timetables for developing nations. Democratic climate change legislation passed in the U.S. House of Representatives earlier this year, but only by a tiny margin of 219-212. On the Senate side, where it takes 60 votes to break a filibuster and pass any bill these days, the odds of a bill passing are in serious doubt.</p>
<p>What happens in the United States over the next several months will directly affect the success or failure of world leaders at Copenhagen, and the United States’ global role for years to come.</p>
<p>Without the passage of a climate-change bill in Congress, the United States will never credibly lead the world on this issue, and we will never be able to reduce our national greenhouse gas emissions. Without significant public support at home, the new Copenhagen treaty, if it emerges at all, will never be ratified in the Senate.</p>
<p>The United States has a golden opportunity to restore our global leadership on the most important issue of our time. We cannot let partisanship and division in Washington stand in the way of that opportunity.</p>
<p>So consider this column a call to action. If you’ve ever cared about the environment, now is the most critical time to make your voice heard. Talk to your friends. Tell your representatives to support climate change legislation.</p>
<p>The opportunity presented by climate change is about more than just saving the trees and polar bears. It’s about restoring our economy by creating new green industries. It’s about securing the future for coming generations. And to me, it’s fundamentally about the ability of our country to accomplish great things and be a leader in the world once again.<br />
<strong><br />
Reach columnist Chris Jordan at opinion@dailyuw.com.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/08/ce-week-6-us-must-seize-climate-change-opportunity/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #5:  &#8220;Obama’s next moves telling&#8221;  Oct. 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-obama%e2%80%99s-next-moves-telling-oct-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-obama%e2%80%99s-next-moves-telling-oct-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 05 Oct 2009 01:14:58 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1058</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by David S. Broder
Barack Obama has reached the moment of truth for answering the persistent question about his core beliefs and political priorities. The coming votes in the House and Senate on his signature health care reform effort will tell us more about the president than anything so far in his White House tenure.
The challenge [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by David S. Broder</strong></p>
<p>Barack Obama has reached the moment of truth for answering the persistent question about his core beliefs and political priorities. The coming votes in the House and Senate on his signature health care reform effort will tell us more about the president than anything so far in his White House tenure.</p>
<p>The challenge is not one he invited. All during last year’s campaign, Obama skillfully skirted the question of whether he was a moderate, consensus-seeking pragmatist, as his words suggested, or a faithful adherent to the liberal agenda, as his voting record demonstrated.</p>
<p>In stylistic terms, he cultivated the pragmatic image. On issues, he was alternately one or the other – lining up with the liberals on Iraq and civil liberties, for example, but joining the hard-liners on Afghanistan and the budget.</p>
<p>In the campaign, he took the moderate side of the health care debate – disagreeing with Hillary Clinton on the necessity for an individual mandate to buy health insurance and suggesting he would be satisfied with incremental progress toward covering all the uninsured.</p>
<p>But now, a number of factors have combined to strip him of the camouflage he once enjoyed when it comes to health care policy.</p>
<p>His effort to craft a bipartisan package with significant Republican support has failed, as GOP leaders in Congress have chosen to take their chances on handing him a costly defeat rather than opting to claim a share of the credit for success. With <strong>Sen. Olympia Snowe of Maine</strong> apparently the only Republican who might vote for the evolving legislation, Obama will have to find virtually all the votes he needs among his fellow Democrats.</p>
<p>Also, the debates inside the five House and Senate committees that have shared in drafting the bills have dramatized the deep ideological splits on the Democratic side of the aisle. The symbolic issue has been <strong>the public option</strong> – the proposal for a Medicare-like insurance plan competing with those offered by private companies.</p>
<p>Four of the five committees have included that proposal; the fifth, the Senate Finance Committee, has explicitly rejected it.</p>
<p>Beyond that much-hyped dispute are multiple disagreements on the cost and financing of the overall reform, with no consensus between the more conservative <strong>Democratic Blue Dogs</strong> and the more numerous liberals, especially in the House.</p>
<p>The first imperative for <strong>House Speaker Nancy Pelosi</strong> and <strong>Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid</strong> is to find a formula that will produce <strong>218 Democratic votes in the House</strong> and <strong>59 of the needed 60 votes in the Senate.</strong></p>
<p>Obama will have to be an active player in that process. But in addition, he will have to negotiate something that will be workable in the real world. As he contemplates a re-election race in 2012, he needs at least three years when his most important domestic initiative has not blown up in his face.</p>
<p>What are his chances of pulling it off? It will not be easy. In the House, Pelosi and a clear majority of the Democratic caucus members want a liberal bill, including the public option. They may have to offer some cosmetic concessions to the Blue Dogs, but they are unlikely to yield on the main points.</p>
<p>In the Senate, on the other hand, while the liberals may prevail on floor amendments to install the public option, they cannot by themselves deliver 60 votes for passage. At this point, the leverage swings to the handful of more conservative, small-state Democratic senators who, with the Republicans, may be able to force substantive changes.</p>
<p>As this plays out – finally, in a House-Senate <strong>conference committee</strong> – the political cost of the Republican decision to be simply a blocking force will become clear. Had the GOP furnished even a few votes in return for seeing some of their concerns addressed, chances are Obama and the Democratic congressional leaders would not have felt the necessity to keep all the liberals in line. This would have given the president more room to maneuver.</p>
<p>As it is, his main leverage point is the realization among nearly all Democrats that nothing would be as costly to them, in their individual 2010 races, as the failure of this Congress, with its heavy Democratic majorities, to pass a substantive health reform bill.</p>
<p>That may be enough in the end for Obama to succeed. But the task of getting there will really test him – and expose his core values.<br />
<strong><br />
David S. Broder is a columnist for the Washington Post. His e-mail address is davidbroder@washpost.com. </strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-obama%e2%80%99s-next-moves-telling-oct-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #5:  &#8220;A look at Obama’s Afghan options&#8221;  Oct. 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-a-look-at-obama%e2%80%99s-afghan-options-oct-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-a-look-at-obama%e2%80%99s-afghan-options-oct-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 05 Oct 2009 00:58:12 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Foreign Affairs]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1056</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[by Robert Burns / Associated Press
WASHINGTON – President Barack Obama is considering a range of ideas for changing course in Afghanistan, from pulling back to staying put to sending thousands more troops to fight the insurgency.
A look at the options and their implications for achieving Obama’s stated goal of defeating al-Qaida.
Getting Out
A full, immediate withdrawal [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>by Robert Burns / Associated Press</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – President Barack Obama is considering a range of ideas for changing course in Afghanistan, from pulling back to staying put to sending thousands more troops to fight the insurgency.</p>
<p>A look at the options and their implications for achieving Obama’s stated goal of defeating al-Qaida.</p>
<p><strong>Getting Out</strong></p>
<p>A full, immediate withdrawal of American forces does not appear to be in the cards, not the least because U.S. allies in NATO share the view that abandoning Afghanistan now would hand a victory to Islamic extremist forces such as the Taliban that are aligned in some respects with Osama bin Laden’s al-Qaida. Some argue that because the al-Qaida figures who were run out of Afghanistan when U.S. troops invaded after the Sept. 11 attacks are now encamped across the border in Pakistan, there is no point to a U.S. military presence in Afghanistan. A related school of thought holds that the very presence of foreign troops in Afghanistan adds to the country’s instability and fuels its insurgency. Obama has taken a different view. Less than two months ago he said, “If left unchecked, the Taliban insurgency will mean an even larger safe haven from which al-Qaida would plot to kill more Americans. So this is not only a war worth fighting. This is fundamental to the defense of our people.”</p>
<p><strong>Scaling Back</strong></p>
<p>A less drastic alternative to a full-scale retreat is a partial pullback. A reduced U.S. force would stay mainly to train and advise the Afghan national army and police. U.S. special operations forces would continue their hunt for most-wanted extremist leaders in Afghanistan. Pilotless drones such as the armed Predator would take out al-Qaida figures on the Pakistan side of the border. This would essentially end the counterinsurgency mission of U.S. and NATO forces. The reasoning is that the fight is not worth the cost in blood and treasure, and al-Qaida is a more urgent priority. This counterterror option would amount to a reversal of the strategy Obama endorsed in March. In the view of military analysts Frederick and Kimberly Kagan, who favor an expanded counterinsurgency campaign, a shift to only training and counterterror operations would be a big mistake. They argue that it would empower the Taliban and al-Qaida, endanger remaining U.S. troops and diplomats and allow Islamic extremists to portray the U.S. pullback as a defeat for the forces of moderation.</p>
<p><strong>Staying Put</strong></p>
<p>One of those advocating no short-term change in the size of the U.S. force in Afghanistan is Sen. Carl Levin, D-Mich., chairman of the Senate Armed Services Committee. He argues for putting greater emphasis on training the Afghan security forces and accelerating their growth. In this approach, the counterinsurgency campaign against the Taliban would continue on course. Additional U.S. troops would be required for the training mission, but not for combat. The flow of equipment for the police and army would be expanded. More effort would be focused on persuading lower-level Taliban fighters to lay down their arms. Gen. Stanley McChrystal, the top commander in Afghanistan, is calling for accelerated training of Afghan forces. But in his view, more combat troops also are required to retake the initiative from the Taliban, which now control or contest large parts of the country. Earlier efforts to speed up Afghan training stalled in part because of a lack of NATO trainers.</p>
<p><strong>Ramping Up</strong></p>
<p>This is the McChrystal plan, which he calls “a fundamentally new way of doing business.” In military parlance, it would be a classic counterinsurgency campaign that could last for years. It would mean sending more U.S. troops – perhaps as many as 40,000. The general says it would mean redefining the fight in ways that enable Afghans to regain control of their own country. McChrystal spelled out his reasoning in a report weeks ago to Defense Secretary Robert Gates, who asked for a comprehensive assessment of the war effort when he removed McChrystal’s predecessor, Gen. David McKiernan, in May in search of “fresh thinking, fresh eyes.” McChrystal says there is no guarantee his approach will work. Critics worry that this escalation would only lead to others, creating a quagmire. But McChrystal argues that if the Afghan government falls to the Taliban – or is unable to counter international terrorist networks – then Afghanistan could again become a base for al-Qaida to launch an attack on the U.S. That’s just what Obama says must be avoided.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-a-look-at-obama%e2%80%99s-afghan-options-oct-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>17</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #5:  &#8220;Health Overhaul Is Drawing Close to Floor Debate&#8221;  Oct 4th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-health-overhaul-is-drawing-close-to-floor-debate-oct-4th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-health-overhaul-is-drawing-close-to-floor-debate-oct-4th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 05 Oct 2009 00:15:41 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1054</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[October 4, 2009
By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN
WASHINGTON — With the Senate Finance Committee set to approve its health care bill this week, Democrats are tantalizingly close to bringing legislation that would make sweeping changes in the nation’s health care system to the floor of both houses of Congress.
Party leaders still face immense political [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>October 4, 2009</p>
<p>By ROBERT PEAR and DAVID M. HERSZENHORN</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON — With the Senate Finance Committee set to approve its health care bill this week, Democrats are tantalizingly close to bringing legislation that would make sweeping changes in the nation’s health care system to the floor of both houses of Congress.</p>
<p>Party leaders still face immense political and policy challenges as they combine rival proposals — two bills in the Senate and three in the House. But the broad contours of the legislation are in place: millions of uninsured Americans would get subsidized health benefits, and the government would move to slow the growth of health spending.</p>
<p>Senior Democrats said they were increasingly confident that a bill would pass this year. “I am Scandinavian, and we don’t like to overstate anything,” said Senator Kent Conrad, Democrat of North Dakota and an architect of the Finance Committee bill. “But I have a solid feeling about the direction of events.”</p>
<p>President Obama, in his weekly address on Saturday, noted Friday’s dismal unemployment numbers and said the health care overhaul would bolster small businesses and create jobs.</p>
<p>Mr. Obama called the overhaul “a critical step in rebuilding our economy” and said he was working with his economic advisers “to explore additional options to promote job creation.”</p>
<p>Step by difficult step, the legislative process is lurching forward. Proponents say they see some momentum — more than they saw in Congress 15 years ago, when President Bill Clinton’s plan for universal health coverage collapsed.</p>
<p>As Senate Democrats try to secure the 60 votes needed to overcome a possible Republican <strong>filibuster</strong>, intricate details and big hurdles stand in their way. Republicans have said they will fight the legislation at every turn.</p>
<p>The policy challenges are also daunting. In the space of one year, the Democrats are trying to restructure one-sixth of the economy, writing a bill that will affect almost every American, every business and every doctor and hospital in the country.</p>
<p>Three House committees approved health care bills in July, as did the Senate health panel. After hearing from constituents in August — some furious, some pleading for change — many Democrats returned to the Capitol determined to plow ahead. They were also emboldened by Mr. Obama’s speech to Congress on Sept. 9 that cast the legislation as a moral and political imperative.</p>
<p><strong>The Finance Committee</strong> is expected to approve its bill this week, after receiving cost estimates from the Congressional Budget Office. And while the panel made numerous changes over seven days of public debate, the core components of its more centrist proposal, developed in months of bipartisan talks, are still intact.</p>
<p>After the committee votes, a new, potentially more perilous phase will begin as party leaders put together the final proposals they will take to the floor of the Senate and the House.</p>
<p>These are some of the huge issues that remain:</p>
<p>¶The major House and Senate bills would require most Americans to carry insurance. This individual <strong>mandate</strong> could touch off an angry public reaction, especially if the penalties for violations are taxes collected by the Internal Revenue Service. Many lawmakers want to minimize the penalties.</p>
<p>¶Whether the government should require employers to provide health benefits to their employees, or pay a penalty, is still an open question. Liberal Democrats say yes. Moderate Democrats are unsure. Republicans are generally opposed.</p>
<p>¶Lawmakers have not decided how to pay for the legislation, expected to cost about $900 billion over 10 years, though they insist that it will not add to the deficit. The House has proposed a surtax on high-income people, while the Senate proposed an excise tax on high-cost insurance plans.</p>
<p>¶Democrats are divided over whether to create a government insurance company to compete with private insurers. The more liberal House will probably not pass a health care bill without such a <strong>public insurance option</strong>, while the Senate appears unlikely to pass one with it.</p>
<p>¶Lawmakers are looking for ways to provide more generous subsidies to help low- and middle-income people buy insurance. Many Democrats and some Republicans, like Senator Olympia J. Snowe of Maine, insist that insurance must be affordable if people are required to buy it.</p>
<p>¶While Congressional leaders say they want to curb the explosive growth of health costs, it is unclear whether the final bill will make a serious effort to do so. Every proposal meets resistance from health care providers who fear a loss of income, even as they stand to gain millions of paying customers if nearly everyone has insurance.</p>
<p>Mr. Conrad said that even some Republicans seemed to recognize the likelihood that Congress would pass major health care legislation this year. “I thought there was an air of resignation that settled over our colleagues on the other side of the aisle,” he said.</p>
<p>But Senator Lamar Alexander of Tennessee, the No. 3 Republican in the Senate, predicted that opposition would grow. “It would be very difficult for a bill like the Finance Committee bill to pass the Senate,” he said. “There is nothing inevitable about such a bill. There is nothing predictable about the Senate floor.”</p>
<p>Republicans are not waiting for the finished product and have unleashed a barrage of criticism. In addition to expanding government and raising taxes, they say, the Democratic plans will hurt older Americans by cutting Medicare, intrude on personal freedom by forcing people to buy insurance and impose new costs on states by expanding Medicaid.</p>
<p>Democrats said that once the Finance Committee acts this week, they will be closer than ever to carrying out a major overhaul of the health care system — a goal that has eluded presidents and Congress for more than a half-century. </p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-health-overhaul-is-drawing-close-to-floor-debate-oct-4th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #5:  &#8220;Census dispels notion about ‘opt-out’ moms&#8221;  Oct. 1st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-census-dispels-notion-about-%e2%80%98opt-out%e2%80%99-moms-oct-1st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-census-dispels-notion-about-%e2%80%98opt-out%e2%80%99-moms-oct-1st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 04 Oct 2009 18:37:32 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Media]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1040</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Donna St. George / Washington Post
By the numbers
5.6 million: Number of full-time, stay-at-home mothers in the United States
165,000: Number of full-time, stay-at-home fathers

WASHINGTON – The first national snapshot of married women who stay home to raise their children shows that the popular obsession with high-achieving professional mothers sidelining careers for family life is largely beside [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Donna St. George / Washington Post</strong></p>
<p><strong>By the numbers<br />
5.6 million: Number of full-time, stay-at-home mothers in the United States<br />
165,000: Number of full-time, stay-at-home fathers<br />
</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – The first national snapshot of married women who stay home to raise their children shows that the popular obsession with high-achieving professional mothers sidelining careers for family life is largely beside the point.</p>
<p>Instead, <strong>census</strong> statistics released today show that stay-at-home mothers tend to be younger and less educated, with lower family incomes. They are more likely than other mothers to be Hispanic or foreign-born.</p>
<p>Census researchers said the new report is the first of its kind and was spurred by interest in the so-called “opt-out revolution” among well-educated women said to be leaving the workforce to care for children at home.</p>
<p>“I do think there is small population, a very small population, that is opting out, but with the nationally representative data, we’re just not seeing that,” said Diana Elliott, a family <strong>demographer</strong> who is co-author of the <strong>U.S. Census Bureau</strong> report.</p>
<p>The report showed that mothering full time at home is a widespread phenomenon, including 5.6 million women, or nearly one in four married mothers with children under age 15. By comparison, the country’s stay-at-home dads number 165,000.</p>
<p>Researchers noted that the somewhat younger ages of stay-at-home mothers could partly explain their lower education levels, and that less family income would be expected with just one parent in the workforce.</p>
<p>Even so, the profile of mothers at home that emerged is at clearly at odds with the popular discussion that has flourished in recent years, they said.</p>
<p>The notion of an opt-out revolution took shape in 2003, when New York Times writer Lisa Belkin coined the term to describe the choices made by a group of high-achieving Princeton women who left the fast track after they had children.</p>
<p>It has since been the subject of public debate, academic study and media obsession. It has been derided as a myth, but has never quite gone away in an era when women still struggle to balance work and family, and motherhood’s conflicts have been parodied and probed in everything from Judith Warner’s book “Perfect Madness” to television’s “Desperate Housewives” and “The Secret Life of a Soccer Mom.”</p>
<p>The census statistics show, for example, that the educational level of nearly one in five mothers at home was less than a high school degree, as compared with one in 12 other mothers. Thirty-two percent of moms at home have at least a bachelor’s degree, compared with 38 percent of other mothers.</p>
<p>Twelve percent of stay-at-home moms live below the poverty line, compared with 5 percent of other mothers. On the other end of the economic scale, about one-third of moms at home had family incomes of $75,000 a year or more, whereas roughly half of other mothers did.</p>
<p>Given this portrait, mothers at home appear to be “the more vulnerable women, for whom I would argue the issue is lack of opportunity,” said sociologist Pamela Stone of Hunter College. “They have a hard time finding a job and finding a job that makes work worth it.”</p>
<p>This may well be illuminating for many observers of family life, she said, because “the attention is always focused on this erroneous perception about the women at the top.”</p>
<p>Stone, who studied successful women who left their careers for a 2007 book called “Opting Out?,” said some shift course and focus on their children but “not at the numbers people think. Even among this advantaged group, there is no upward trend of staying at home.”</p>
<p><strong>The Census report was based on nationally representative data from 2007, predating the current economic crisis.</strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/04/ce-week-5-census-dispels-notion-about-%e2%80%98opt-out%e2%80%99-moms-oct-1st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #5:  &#8220;Gun control case to get court’s ear&#8221;  Oct. 1st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/03/ce-week-5-gun-control-case-to-get-court%e2%80%99s-ear-oct-1st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/03/ce-week-5-gun-control-case-to-get-court%e2%80%99s-ear-oct-1st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 04 Oct 2009 00:47:44 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Supreme Court]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1044</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Hearing could test reach of Second Amendment
Robert Barnes / Washington Post
Tags: gun rights u.s. supreme court
Associated Press The Supreme Court sits for a group photograph Tuesday ahead of the new session. The justices are: Samuel Alito Jr., Ruth Bader Ginsburg, Stephen Breyer, Sonia Sotomayor, Anthony M. Kennedy, John Paul Stevens, Chief Justice John G. Roberts, [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Hearing could test reach of Second Amendment<br />
Robert Barnes / Washington Post</strong></p>
<p>Tags: gun rights u.s. supreme court</p>
<p><strong>Associated Press The Supreme Court sits for a group photograph Tuesday ahead of the new session. The justices are: Samuel Alito Jr., Ruth Bader Ginsburg, Stephen Breyer, Sonia Sotomayor, Anthony M. Kennedy, John Paul Stevens, Chief Justice John G. Roberts, Antonin Scalia and Clarence Thomas.</strong></p>
<p>WASHINGTON – <strong>The Supreme Court</strong> set up a historic decision on gun control Wednesday, saying it will rule whether restrictive state and local laws violate <strong>the Second Amendment</strong> right to gun ownership that it recognized last year.</p>
<p>The landmark 2008 decision to strike down the District of Columbia’s ban on handgun possession was the first time the court had said the amendment grants an individual right to own a gun for self-defense. But the 5-to-4 opinion in District of Columbia v. Heller did not address the question of whether the Second Amendment extends beyond the federal government and federal enclaves such as Washington, D.C.</p>
<p>Most court observers think that the five justices who recognized the individual right will also find that <strong>the Second Amendment applies to state and local governments</strong>, a move that could spark challenges of state and local laws governing gun registration, how and when the weapons can be carried, and storage requirements.</p>
<p>The court will hear a challenge of handgun laws in Chicago and the neighboring village of Oak Park, Ill. It was filed by Alexandria, Va. attorney Alan Gura, who successfully argued the Heller case. He said the Chicago ban is “identical” to the one found unconstitutional in the District.</p>
<p>The announcement came as the court prepared for its new term, which will officially begin on Monday. Justices sifted through more than 2,000 petitions accumulated through the summer and selected 10 to hear.</p>
<p>Also on the list was an examination of an anti-terrorism statute, widely used by federal prosecutors, that bans material support to groups that the State Department designates as terrorism organizations.</p>
<p>Solicitor General Elena Kagan told the court that the law is a “vital part of the nation’s effort to fight international terrorism,” but a lower court said some of the statute was unconstitutionally vague.</p>
<p>The decision to accept the Chicago gun case was a natural progression from the decision in Heller, which split the court on ideological grounds. <strong>The liberal justices said the Second Amendment guaranteed only a collective right for gun ownership to maintain militias.</strong></p>
<p>If the amendment is extended, the next question will be about the kind of restrictions allowed. The Heller opinion by <strong>Justice Antonin Scalia </strong>said some requirements would be constitutional, but it was not specific.</p>
<p>Gura hopes for a “definitive ruling” on Chicago’s restrictions, and said he thinks that at a minimum the court would strike the same kind of handgun ban it found objectionable in Washington.</p>
<p>But gun-control advocates played down the importance of the case, saying few states or municipalities had such restrictive laws. Only a handful of states do not protect gun ownership in their constitutions, and 33 filed a brief advocating that the court find that the Second Amendment applies to them.</p>
<p>“Even if the court were to hold the Second Amendment applicable to states and localities, such a ruling is unlikely to change the crucial holding by the Supreme Court in Heller that a wide range of reasonable gun laws are presumptively constitutional, and that the Second Amendment right is narrowly limited to guns in the home for self-defense,” said Paul Helmke, president of the Brady Campaign to Prevent Gun Violence.</p>
<p>The method by which the court might apply the Second Amendment is what interests constitutional scholars. <strong>The Bill of Rights</strong> originally was thought to be a restriction on the federal government, a perception furthered by a 19th Century court ruling that differentiated between state and federal rights.</p>
<p>Since then, the court has gradually applied most of the 10 amendments to the states in <strong>a process called “incorporation,”</strong> but not the Second Amendment.</p>
<p>Gura is supported by liberal and conservative scholars who say the issue should be taken care of by the post-Civil War <strong>14th Amendment</strong>, which says a state may not “abridge the privileges and immunities” of citizens nor deprive liberty “without due process of law.”</p>
<p>Clark Neily, a senior lawyer at the conservative Institute for Justice, said in a statement: <strong>“This case is about more than guns – it is about whether the Supreme Court should interpret the Constitution as the powerful protection of liberty it was intended to be.</strong> His organization sees the “privileges and immunities” clause as a protector of “economic liberty” and “armed self-defense.”</p>
<p>Liberal scholars such as Doug Kendall of the Constitutional Accountability Center consider the clause an “explicit protection for substantive liberty that would reinforce the constitutional underpinnings of <strong>Roe v. Wade</strong> and the court’s ruling protecting sexual autonomy for gays and lesbians.”</p>
<p><strong>Justice Sonia Sotomayor</strong> was part of a panel on the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 2nd Circuit that said in an unrelated case that only the Supreme Court could decide whether the Second Amendment applies beyond the federal confines. Because the court accepted the case from the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 7th Circuit, she is free to participate.</p>
<p>The case is <strong>McDonald v. Chicago</strong>. The earliest it would be argued is Jan. 11.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/10/03/ce-week-5-gun-control-case-to-get-court%e2%80%99s-ear-oct-1st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #4:  &#8220;Mitt Romney&#8217;s Marathon Run&#8221;  Sept. 27th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-mitt-romneys-marathon-run-sept-27th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-mitt-romneys-marathon-run-sept-27th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 27 Sep 2009 15:23:58 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[2008 Election]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1027</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
By: Byron York
Chief Political Correspondent
September 27, 2009








(NATE BEELER)



A bridesmaid in 2008, he&#8217;s laying the groundwork for a successful bid by raising money for GOP candidates, courting party activists, writing a book and getting plenty of face time on TV
Mitt Romney has the look of a man who&#8217;s running for president. And if you&#8217;re running for [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div>
<h3>By: Byron York<br />
Chief Political Correspondent<br />
<span>September 27, 2009</span></h3>
</div>
<div>
<table style="float: right; clear: both;" border="0" cellspacing="5" cellpadding="5" width="229">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="247"><img src="http://media.washingtonexaminer.com/images/250*157/27Romney_Mitt_WEB.jpg" border="0" alt="" width="250" height="157" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><span>(NATE BEELER)</span></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><span style="font-size: small;"><em>A bridesmaid in 2008, he&#8217;s laying the groundwork for a successful bid by raising money for GOP candidates, courting party activists, writing a book and getting plenty of face time on TV</em></span></p>
<p>Mitt Romney has the look of a man who&#8217;s running for president. And if you&#8217;re running for president, three years before your party&#8217;s nominating convention, it&#8217;s absolutely essential to say that it&#8217;s way too early to think about running for president. So the former Massachusetts governor demurs when asked his intentions.</p>
<p>&#8220;It&#8217;s way too early to make that consideration,&#8221; Romney says. &#8220;Who knows what the future holds?&#8221;</p>
<p>Romney is sitting in a suite in Washington&#8217;s Omni Shoreham Hotel, where the next day he will address the annual Values Voter Summit, a gathering of conservative activists sponsored by the <em><strong>Family Research Council</strong></em>. In the suite, across from a credenza stacked with catered sandwiches, Romney&#8217;s staff has set up a <em><strong>teleprompter</strong></em> &#8212; monitors, those glass panels on high stands, the whole thing &#8212; for him to practice the speech.</p>
<p>This stop in Washington is part of Romney&#8217;s extensive work on behalf of Republican candidates around the country. On the day we spoke, he appeared at a fundraising breakfast for Virginia Republican Lt. Gov. Bill Bolling, and that evening attended a fundraiser for <em><strong>GOP gubernatorial candidate</strong></em> Bob McDonnell. After the Values Voter Summit, he was off to New Jersey to help out Chris Christie, the Republican currently leading in the governor&#8217;s race.</p>
<p>&#8220;What&#8217;s on my horizon right now is trying to help pick up some seats in 2010, and of course some key races in 2009,&#8221; Romney says.</p>
<p>Romney is doing all this work through his <em><strong>political action committee, the Free and Strong America PAC</strong></em>, which he formed in May 2008, not long after conceding to Sen. John McCain in the Republican primary race. The PAC has raised more than $2.3 million and given out about $1.8 million &#8212; far more than any other Republican contender&#8217;s PAC. In 2008 alone, Free and Strong America endorsed 83 candidates for the House and Senate; Romney attended 34 events for those candidates, in addition to 37 events for the McCain campaign.</p>
<p>Romney is also working on a book, &#8220;<em><strong>No Apology: The Case for American Greatness</strong></em>,&#8221; which will be out next March. He makes clear that he&#8217;s writing every word himself. &#8220;I didn&#8217;t have a writer who interviewed me twice and is now writing the book,&#8221; he says. In addition, Romney appears on television to discuss issues of particular concern to him &#8212; the stimulus, the takeovers of the auto companies, health care.</p>
<p>So if you <em><strong>list the things politicians do when they&#8217;re in the early stages of a presidential run</strong></em> &#8212; well, Romney qualifies.</p>
<p><em><strong>Political action committee? Check.</strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong>Fundraising for GOP candidates? Check.</strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong>Courting party activists? Check.</strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong>Profile-raising book? Check.</strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong>TV appearances? Check.</strong></em></p>
<p>Since he had hoped to be in the White House now, I ask what the first eight months of a Romney administration would have looked like, as opposed to what President Obama has done. &#8220;First of all, I would have followed through on his commitment to work on a bipartisan basis,&#8221; Romney says. Next, Romney says his stimulus proposal &#8212; he does believe we needed one &#8212; would have been &#8220;far more carefully crafted to create jobs immediately.&#8221; Romney would have put stimulus dollars into buying much-needed equipment for the U.S. military, as well as infrastructure projects, and he would also have made tax policy more business-friendly.</p>
<p>What else? &#8220;<em><strong>Cap and trade</strong></em> &#8212; I wouldn&#8217;t even touch that,&#8221; Romney says. &#8220;It&#8217;s the wrong course.&#8221; But he would have made health care a major part of his presidential agenda.</p>
<p>&#8220;I like what we did in Massachusetts,&#8221; Romney says, referring to the universal coverage program he and the Democratic state legislature crafted in 2006. &#8220;I think it works in Massachusetts.&#8221; Pay close attention to that last part: Romney defends the system in his overwhelmingly Democratic home state, but he&#8217;s careful to say that as president, he would give all the states greater flexibility to come up with their own fixes, which might be different from what exists in Massachusetts. The ultimate goal, he says, is &#8220;getting government less involved in the health care market.&#8221;</p>
<p>If Romney runs, his health care record will likely be a big target for primary opponents. The Wall Street Journal editorial page hates it, and other critics &#8212; and rivals &#8212; point to its rising costs and potential for abuse. &#8220;You want to see what government-run health care looks like?&#8221; <em><strong>Mike Huckabee, the former Arkansas governor and 2008 presidential candidate</strong></em>, asked the crowd at the Values Voter Summit. &#8220;A couple of states have tried it, Tennessee and Massachusetts. It bankrupted both states.&#8221;</p>
<p>&#8220;Not every feature of our plan was perfect,&#8221; Romney answers in his own speech to the group, &#8220;but it does teach this important lesson: You can get everyone insured without breaking the bank and without a government option.&#8221; The plan&#8217;s costs, Romney says, have stayed within original projections.</p>
<p>At the end of the Values Voter gathering, when participants voted in a straw poll of possible 2012 contenders, Huckabee took first place, with 28.5 percent of the vote, while Romney took second, with 12.4 percent, and <em><strong>Minnesota Gov. Tim Pawlenty</strong></em>, who also appeared in person, took third with 12.2 percent. Huckabee&#8217;s win was no surprise; the former preacher has always been able to connect with the heavily evangelical crowd. The fact that Romney, after running hard and spending a reported $42 million of his own money in 2008, and then working assiduously this year, barely nipped Pawlenty, who is exploring a first-time run, was not something that will build confidence among Romney supporters. (By the way, <em><strong>Sarah Palin</strong></em>, who did not speak to the convention, was fourth, with 12 percent.)</p>
<p>It&#8217;s hard to predict Romney&#8217;s chances in a wide-open Republican primary race. The party has a habit of nominating the candidate who finished second the time before, but for the GOP in 2012 that will be a tricky question. By the end of the &#8216;08 primary season, Romney and Huckabee had virtually the same number of delegates, and neither man was the clear No. 2. And with his own books, speeches, PAC and TV show, Huckabee will likely be in the mix again.</p>
<p>Romney might benefit from buyer&#8217;s remorse on the part of some Republican primary voters. McCain was respected but never well-liked among the Republican base, and when the economy collapsed in the months before the election, some in the GOP regretted not having Romney, the former chief executive officer of Bain Capital and a man who knows business, on the ticket. But it was too late to do anything about it.</p>
<p>There&#8217;s also no way to know whether <em><strong>the Mormon factor</strong></em> will again come into play. In 2008, some evangelicals rejected Romney on the basis of his religion, even after he gave a much-publicized speech on the role of faith in his life and in politics. That might still be an issue next time around.</p>
<p>Then there&#8217;s the age factor. On Inauguration Day 2013, Barack Obama will be barely into his 50s, while Romney will be nearly 66 years old, placing him in the historical upper reaches of presidential newcomers. But after a life of exercise, no alcohol, no tobacco, no caffeine and a happy marriage, Romney looks exceedingly fit and far younger than his years. None of us knows how long we have on this Earth, but if Mitt Romney keels over any time soon, it will be a major surprise.</p>
<p>Back in the suite at the Omni Shoreham, Romney dodges questions on 2012 but lights up when asked about his 2008 run. &#8220;It&#8217;s hard work,&#8221; he says, &#8220;but you get to know the American people in a way I never would have imagined.&#8221; Running was an &#8220;expanding&#8221; experience, Romney says, introducing him to new friends all around the country.</p>
<p>&#8220;Let me tell you,&#8221; Romney adds with a broad smile, &#8220;if you get the chance to run for president, do it.&#8221;</p>
<p><strong><em>Byron York can be contacted at <a href="http://www.washingtonexaminer.com/politics/%20mailto:byork@washingtonexaminer.com" target="_blank">byork@washingtonexaminer.com</a>. His political column appears on Tuesday and Friday, and his stories and blog posts appears on www.ExaminerPolitics.com ExaminerPolitics.com.</em></strong></p>
<p><strong><em> </em></strong></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-mitt-romneys-marathon-run-sept-27th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #4:  &#8220;Playing Chicken With Suicide Bombers&#8221;  Sept. 27th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-playing-chicken-with-suicide-bombers-sept-27th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-playing-chicken-with-suicide-bombers-sept-27th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 27 Sep 2009 15:11:37 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The War on Terrorism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1024</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[September 27, 2009
The New York Times:  Op-Ed Contributor
By JOHN FARMER Jr.
THE nation is abuzz with praise for law enforcement. After months of careful investigation, involving extensive surveillance and international monitoring of travel and financial records, the authorities disrupt a major Qaeda cell operating domestically, arresting the primary conspirators. The conspirators are indicted and detained, and [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><em><strong>September 27, 2009</strong></em></div>
<div><em><strong>The New York Times:  Op-Ed Contributor</strong></em></div>
<div><em><strong>By JOHN FARMER Jr.</strong></em></div>
<p>THE nation is abuzz with praise for law enforcement. After months of careful investigation, involving extensive surveillance and international monitoring of travel and financial records, the authorities disrupt a major Qaeda cell operating domestically, arresting the primary conspirators. The conspirators are indicted and detained, and the nation breathes a sigh of relief.</p>
<p>Until the subway explodes.</p>
<p>The situation described above is not, thankfully, what has happened in the wake of the arrests this month of Najibullah Zazi, his father and several alleged confederates in Colorado and New York. Instead, it describes what happened in England in 2004 when the authorities, in Operation Crevice, arrested several terrorists (five of whom were eventually convicted) but had insufficient evidence to charge several other associates. Those other men went on to bomb the London subway on July 7, 2005.</p>
<p>Taken together, the Zazi and British cases illustrate a daunting challenge facing the criminal justice system in dealing with domestic terrorism attacks: law enforcement must constantly balance its need to develop evidence sufficient to convict the conspirators against the potentially devastating consequences of allowing the conspiracy to ripen into an attack.</p>
<p>To arrest the suspects prematurely is to run the risks of acquittal, of forcing prosecutors to advocate and courts to accept overly broad interpretations of existing criminal statutes, and perhaps of arresting innocent people. To decide to wait, however, continuing surveillance in the hope of developing better proof, is to risk losing the suspects and placing the public in mortal peril.</p>
<p>Police departments, prosecutors and the F.B.I. all face similar challenges in other criminal contexts. Anyone who has been involved at a senior level in serious investigations is aware of the suspected sexual predator or armed bank robber — or even the suspected serial killer — who must be left at large because of the lack of admissible evidence. Sometimes, proof is developed and the perpetrator is caught; sometimes, people get hurt.</p>
<p>As a society, we have weighed the risks to public safety in curtailing police power against the risks to public liberty of allowing too much police power. The balance we have struck is reflected in our constitutional protections. The question posed by terrorism, however, is whether the stakes — possibly tens of thousands of deaths — are sufficiently higher to alter that balance in favor of greater government power.</p>
<p>History shows that our decisions have yielded mixed results. During the mid-1990s, the authorities were able to develop strong evidence against Omar Abdel-Rahman, known as the Blind Sheik, and his fellow conspirators who were plotting to blow up New York City landmarks; they were convicted in 1995. In an earlier case, however, the unwillingness of a confidential informant to develop evidence that could be used in court led the F.B.I. to cut ties with him in 1992; the group on which he had been informing went on to bomb the World Trade Center the following February.</p>
<p>Prosecutors in the Zazi case to date have been unable to charge several other suspected co-conspirators — as many as 24, according to some reports. And while Mr. Zazi has now been accused by authorities of conspiring to make bombs, the other arrestees have been charged only with the relatively minor offense of lying to the authorities. Law enforcement is described in several news reports as “stretched thin” as it conducts surveillance of Mr. Zazi’s associates.</p>
<p>This has an ominous precedent: in the wake of the 2004 arrests, British authorities followed the other associates who had appeared on video surveillance with the conspirators, but eventually lost interest and moved on to other investigations. Those forgotten men proceeded to kill 52 people and wound 700 more.</p>
<p>Time will tell whether the decision to arrest Mr. Zazi and his associates was premature. If the case against them does not develop beyond what has been reported, and if no useable evidence is developed against the 24 other men, the decision to arrest will be second-guessed. That would be grossly unfair. From a public safety perspective, law enforcement officers and prosecutors cannot be faulted for acting when they believe that the public is in imminent peril, even if that means compromising an investigation.</p>
<p>The larger issue raised here is whether there is a viable alternative to the nerve-racking game of chicken that law enforcement must play in terrorism cases. The obvious — though extremely unpopular — alternative is the passage of a <em><strong>preventive detention statute</strong></em>.</p>
<p>Such statutes have been upheld in the context of people with a demonstrated proclivity toward violent conduct, like sexual predators; the concept could be adapted, in a way that withstands constitutional scrutiny, to cover people with a demonstrated proclivity toward terrorism. That approach would give law enforcement additional means to disrupt potential terrorist plots. It has the virtue of honesty, obviating the strained and sometimes disingenuous use of material-witness and false-statement statutes that are now frequently used to arrest and hold suspected terrorists, and would remove the temptation to criminalize conduct that borders on free speech.</p>
<p>Still, preventive detention is hardly a panacea. What should the burden of proof be in using “civil commitment” regarding terrorism? When should that burden be adjusted, if ever? How often would a subject’s status be reviewed? How long may someone be held? There is, moreover, something about detaining someone before he has committed an offense that runs counter to our core constitutional values.</p>
<p>The Zazi case may well end up providing more questions than answers. In the absence of some mechanism allowing for preventive detention, the F.B.I. and police must continue to make hair-trigger judgments in real time about whether and when to arrest and charge suspects. Those are decisions our law enforcement officials routinely make, and make well, in other contexts; in terrorism cases, however, we have to ask if the stakes are too high for the system we have in place.</p>
<p><em><strong>John Farmer Jr., a former attorney general of New Jersey, is the dean of the Rutgers School of Law at Newark and the author of “The Ground Truth.”</strong></em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/27/ce-week-4-playing-chicken-with-suicide-bombers-sept-27th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #3:  &#8220;The Case for Killing Granny&#8221;  Sept. 18th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/20/ce-week-3-the-case-for-killing-granny-sept-18th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/20/ce-week-3-the-case-for-killing-granny-sept-18th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 20 Sep 2009 23:20:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Science]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=1006</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Rethinking end-of-life care.

By Evan Thomas &#124; NEWSWEEK 
Published Sep 12, 2009
From the magazine issue dated Sep 21, 2009
My mother wanted to die, but the doctors wouldn&#8217;t let her. At least that&#8217;s the way it seemed to me as I stood by her bed in an intensive-care unit at a hospital in Hilton Head, S.C., five years [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><em><strong>Rethinking end-of-life care.</strong></em></div>
<div>
<p><em><strong>By </strong><strong><a href="http://search.newsweek.com/search?byline=evan%20thomas">Evan Thomas</a> | <span>NEWSWEEK </span></strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong><span>Published Sep 12, 2009</span></strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong>From the magazine issue dated Sep 21, 2009</strong></em></div>
<p>My mother wanted to die, but the doctors wouldn&#8217;t let her. At least that&#8217;s the way it seemed to me as I stood by her bed in an intensive-care unit at a hospital in Hilton Head, S.C., five years ago. My mother was 79, a longtime smoker who was dying of emphysema. She knew that her quality of life was increasingly tethered to an oxygen tank, that she was losing her ability to get about, and that she was slowly drowning. The doctors at her bedside were recommending various tests and procedures to keep her alive, but my mother, with a certain firmness I recognized, said no. She seemed puzzled and a bit frustrated that she had to be so insistent on her own demise.</p>
<p>The hospital at my mother&#8217;s assisted-living facility was sustained by Medicare, which pays by the procedure. I don&#8217;t think the doctors were trying to be greedy by pushing more treatments on my mother. That&#8217;s just the way the system works. The doctors were responding to the expectations of almost all patients. As a doctor friend of mine puts it, &#8220;Americans want the best, they want the latest, and they want it now.&#8221; We expect doctors to make heroic efforts—especially to save our lives and the lives of our loved ones.</p>
<div><!--AD BEGIN--></p>
<div>
<div><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
placeAd2(commercialNode,'bigbox',false,'')
// ]]&gt;</script><script src="http://ad.doubleclick.net/adj/nwswk.printthis;dir=printthis;ad=bb;del=js;ajax=n;dcopt=ist;heavy=n;pageId=nwswk-id-215291-output-print;poe=no;undefinedfromrss=n;rss=n;front=n;pos=bigbox;sz=300x250;tile=1;ord=398284148333780200?"></script>The idea that we might ration health care to seniors (or anyone else) is political anathema. Politicians do not dare breathe the R word, lest they be accused—however wrongly—of trying to pull the plug on Grandma. But the need to spend less money on the elderly at the end of life is the elephant in the room in the health-reform debate. Everyone sees it but no one wants to talk about it. At a more basic level, Americans are afraid not just of dying, but of talking and thinking about death. Until Americans learn to contemplate death as more than a scientific challenge to be overcome, our health-care system will remain unfixable.</div>
</div>
<p><!--AD END--></div>
<p>Compared with other Western countries, the United States has more health care—but, generally speaking, not better health care. There is no way we can get control of costs, which have grown by nearly 50 percent in the past decade, without finding a way to stop overtreating patients. In his address to Congress, President Obama spoke airily about reducing inefficiency, but he slid past the hard choices that will have to be made to stop health care from devouring ever-larger slices of the economy and tax dollar. A significant portion of the savings will have to come from the money we spend on seniors at the end of life because, as Willie Sutton explained about why he robbed banks, that&#8217;s where the money is.</p>
<p><strong>As President Obama said, most of the uncontrolled growth in federal spending and the deficit comes from Medicare; nothing else comes close. Almost a third of the money spent by Medicare—about $66.8 billion a year—goes to chronically ill patients in the last two years of life.</strong> This might seem obvious—of course the costs come at the end, when patients are the sickest. But that can&#8217;t explain what researchers at Dartmouth have discovered: <em><strong>Medicare spends twice as much on similar patients in some parts of the country as in others.</strong></em> The average cost of a Medicare patient in Miami is $16,351; the average in Honolulu is $5,311. In the Bronx, N.Y., it&#8217;s $12,543. In Fargo, N.D., $5,738. The average Medicare patient undergoing end-of-life treatment spends 21.9 days in a Manhattan hospital. In Mason City, Iowa, he or she spends only 6.1 days.</p>
<p>Maybe it&#8217;s unsurprising that treatment in rural towns costs less than in big cities, with all their high prices, varied populations, and urban woes. But there are also significant disparities in towns that are otherwise very similar. How do you explain the fact, for instance, that in Boulder, Colo., the average cost of Medicare treatment is $9,103, whereas an hour away in Fort Collins, Colo., the cost is $6,448?</p>
<p>The answer, the Dartmouth researchers found, is that in some places doctors are just more likely to order more tests and procedures. More specialists are involved. There is very little reason for them <em>not</em> to order more tests and treatments. By training and inclination, doctors want to do all they can to cure ailments. And since Medicare pays by procedure, test, and hospital stay—though less and less each year as the cost squeeze tightens—there is an incentive to do more and more. To make a good living, doctors must see more patients, and order more tests.</p>
<p>All this treatment does not necessarily buy better care. In fact, the Dartmouth studies have found worse outcomes in many states and cities where there is more health care. Why? Because just going into the hospital has risks—of infection, or error, or other unforeseen complications. <em><strong>Some studies estimate that Americans are overtreated by roughly 30 percent.</strong></em> &#8220;It&#8217;s not about rationing care—that&#8217;s always the bogeyman people use to block reform,&#8221; says Dr. Elliott Fisher, a professor at Dartmouth Medical School. &#8220;The real problem is unnecessary and unwanted care.&#8221;</p>
<p>But how do you decide which treatments to cut out? How do you choose between the necessary and the unnecessary? There has been talk among experts and lawmakers of giving more power to a panel of government experts to decide—Britain has one, called the National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (known by the somewhat ironic acronym NICE). But no one wants the horror stories of denied care and long waits that are said to plague state-run national health-care systems. (The criticism is unfair: patients wait longer to see primary-care physicians in the United States than in Britain.) After the summer of angry town halls, no politician is going to get anywhere near something that could be called a &#8220;death panel.&#8221;</p>
<p>There&#8217;s no question that reining in the lawyers would help cut costs. Fearing medical-malpractice suits, doctors engage in defensive medicine, ordering procedures that may not be strictly necessary—but why take the risk? According to various studies, defensive medicine adds perhaps 2 percent to the overall bill—a not-insignificant number when more than $2 trillion is at stake. A number of states have managed to institute some kind of so-called tort reform, limiting the size of damage awards by juries in medical-malpractice cases. But the trial lawyers—big donors to the Democratic Party—have stopped Congress from even considering reforms. That&#8217;s why it was significant that President Obama even raised the subject in his speech last week, even if he was vague about just what he&#8217;d do. (Best idea: create medical courts run by experts to rule on malpractice claims, with no punitive damages.)</p>
<p>But the biggest cost booster is the way doctors are paid under most insurance systems, including Medicare. It&#8217;s called fee-for-service, and it means just that. So why not just put doctors on salary? Some medical groups that do, like the Mayo Clinic, have reduced costs while producing better results. Unfortunately, putting doctors on salary requires that they work for someone, and most American physicians are self-employed or work in small group practices. The alternative—paying them a flat rate for each patient they care for—turned out to be at least a partial bust. HMOs that paid doctors a flat fee in the 1990s faced a backlash as patients bridled at long waits and denied service.</p>
<p><em><strong>Ever-rising health-care spending now consumes about 17 percent of the economy (versus about 10 percent in Europe). At the current rate of increase, it will devour a fifth of GDP by 2018</strong></em>. We cannot afford to sustain a productive economy with so much money going to health care. Over time, economic reality may force us to adopt a national health-care system like Britain&#8217;s or Canada&#8217;s. But before that day arrives, there are steps we can take to reduce costs without totally turning the system inside out.</p>
<p>One place to start is to consider the psychological aspect of health care. Most people are at least minor hypochondriacs (I know I am). They use doctors to make themselves feel better, even if the doctor is not doing much to physically heal what ails them. (In ancient times, doctors often made people sicker with quack cures like bleeding.) The desire to see a physician is often pronounced in assisted-living facilities. Old people, far from their families in our mobile, atomized society, depend on their doctors for care and reassurance. I noticed that in my mother&#8217;s retirement home, the talk in the dining room was often about illness; people built their day around doctor&#8217;s visits, partly, it seemed to me, to combat loneliness.</p>
<p>Physicians at Massachusetts General Hospital are experimenting with innovative approaches to care for their most ill patients without necessarily sending them to the doctor. Three years ago, Massachusetts enacted universal care—just as Congress and the Obama administration are attempting to do now. The state quickly found it could not afford to meet everyone&#8217;s health-care demands, so it&#8217;s scrambling for solutions. The Mass General program assigned nurses to the hospital&#8217;s 2,600 sickest—and costliest—Medicare patients. These nurses provide basic care, making sure the patients take their medications and so forth, and act as gatekeepers—they decide if a visit to the doctor is really necessary. It&#8217;s not a perfect system—people will still demand to see their doctors when it&#8217;s unnecessary—but the Mass General program cut costs by 5 percent while providing the elderly what they want and need most: caring human contact.</p>
<p>Other initiatives ensure that the elderly get counseling about end-of-life issues. Although demagogued as a &#8220;death panel,&#8221; a program in Wisconsin to get patients to talk to their doctors about how they want to deal with death was actually a resounding success. A study by the <em>Archives of Internal Medicine</em> shows that such conversations between doctors and patients can decrease costs by about 35 percent—while improving the quality of life at the end. Patients should be encouraged to draft living wills to make their end-of-life desires known. Unfortunately, such paper can be useless if there is a family member at the bedside demanding heroic measures. &#8220;A lot of the time guilt is playing a role,&#8221; says Dr. David Torchiana, a surgeon and CEO of the Massachusetts General Physicians Organization. Doctors can feel guilty, too—about overtreating patients. Torchiana recalls his unease over operating to treat a severe heart infection in a woman with two forms of metastatic cancer who was already comatose. The family insisted.</p>
<p>Studies show that about 70 percent of people want to die at home—but that about half die in hospitals. There has been an important increase in hospice or palliative care—keeping patients with incurable diseases as comfortable as possible while they live out the remainder of their lives. Hospice services are generally intended for the terminally ill in the last six months of life, but as a practical matter, many people receive hospice care for only a few weeks.</p>
<p>Our medical system does everything it can to encourage hope. And American health care has been near miraculous—the envy of the world—in its capacity to develop new lifesaving and life-enhancing treatments. But death can be delayed only so long, and sometimes the wait is grim and degrading. The hospice ideal recognized that for many people, quiet and dignity—and loving care and good painkillers—are really what&#8217;s called for.</p>
<p>That&#8217;s what my mother wanted. After convincing the doctors that she meant it—that she really was ready to die—she was transferred from the ICU to a hospice, where, five days later, she passed away. In the ICU, as they removed all the monitors and pulled out all the tubes and wires, she made a fluttery motion with her hands. She seemed to be signaling goodbye to all that—I&#8217;m free to go in peace.<br />
 <!-- Omniture --><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[</p>
<p>			var nw_page_name = "nw - article - 215291 - The Case for Killing Granny";
			var nw_section = "health";
			var nw_content_type = "article";
			var nw_source = "newsweek mag";
			var nw_search_result_count = "0";
			var nw_content_id = "215291";
			var nw_headline = "The Case for Killing Granny";
			var nw_author = "evan thomas";
			var nw_page_num = "print format";
			var nw_application = "gutenberg";
			var nw_hierarchy = "health|articles";
			var nw_pub_date = "Saturday September 12, 2009";
// ]]&gt;</script></p>
<p><strong><em>With Pat Wingert, Suzanne Smalley, and Claudia Kalb in Washington</em></strong></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/20/ce-week-3-the-case-for-killing-granny-sept-18th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #2:  &#8220;O’Connor urges end to judicial elections&#8221;  Sept. 15th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/16/ce-week-2-o%e2%80%99connor-urges-end-to-judicial-elections-sept-15th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/16/ce-week-2-o%e2%80%99connor-urges-end-to-judicial-elections-sept-15th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 16 Sep 2009 13:17:08 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Federalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Polls]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Supreme Court]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=999</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[ 

Marcus Donner, photographing on behalf of Seattle University, uses the dining table to take a group photograph of Seattle University law students and faculty with retired Supreme Court Justice Sandra Day O’Connor Monday on SU’s campus. O’Connor was the featured speaker in a daylong seminar at the school. Seattle Times
SEATTLE – The first woman to [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><span> </span></div>
<div id="story-body">
<div><img src="http://media.spokesman.com/photos/2009/09/15/cop_justicedayoconnor15_09-15-2009_8CH0549_t210.jpg?74a72ef94756bccc16ea1c78066b52f96b62dbc7" alt="" /><em>Marcus Donner, photographing on behalf of Seattle University, uses the dining table to take a group photograph of Seattle University law students and faculty with retired Supreme Court Justice Sandra Day O’Connor Monday on SU’s campus. O’Connor was the featured speaker in a daylong seminar at the school. Seattle Times</em></div>
<p><strong>SEATTLE</strong> – The first woman to serve on the <em><strong>U.S. Supreme Court</strong></em> says there’s a serious problem with the government in Washington and many other states: They elect their judges.</p>
<p>Retired Justice Sandra Day O’Connor spoke Monday at a Seattle University Law School conference. She told a sold-out audience that threats to judicial independence are rising exponentially as more and more money pours into judicial races around the country.</p>
<p>“It’s the flood of money coming into our courtrooms,” O’Connor said. “You haven’t suffered too much of this in Washington – but you will, if you don’t think about this and change it.”</p>
<p>Washington is one of about two dozen states that have elections for at least some judges, from trial courts to state supreme courts. Many judges in Washington are initially appointed to vacancies on the bench, and many run for re-election unopposed. But judges on the state Supreme Court frequently face challengers.</p>
<p>The conference focused largely on questions surrounding the <em><strong>U.S. Supreme Court’s June decision in Caperton v. Massey Coal</strong></em>, which held that elected judges must step aside from cases when large campaign contributions from interested parties create the appearance of bias.</p>
<p>Since 1934, a number of state panels have recommended that Washington do away with judicial elections in favor of a merit-based appointment system.</p>
<p>O’Connor said she advocates a system by which nonpartisan commissions select judges based on their merit. At the end of a judge’s term, voters could decide whether to retain them.</p>
<p>Multimillion-dollar judicial campaigns make it difficult to know whether a judge is deciding a case based on the merits or on concerns about re-election, she said.</p>
<p>She noted that <em><strong>the founders of the country believed it crucially important that federal judges have the freedom to make unpopular decisions without worrying about poll numbers.</strong></em></p>
<p>Referring to cases such as <em><strong>Brown v. Board of Education, the 1954 Supreme Court decision that outlawed school segregation</strong></em>, O’Connor said, “Consider whether those hugely unpopular decisions would have come to pass if judges had to stand for upcoming elections.”</p>
<p>O’Connor was a state judge in Arizona before being appointed to the Supreme Court by President Ronald Reagan in 1981. She retired in 2006 and said she has devoted her retirement to trying to abolish judicial elections and to push for a new emphasis on civics education in public schools.</p>
<p>She was joined on a panel by Washington state Chief Justice Gerry Alexander, Texas Chief Justice Wallace Jefferson and other judges and lawyers. Alexander said that even though he was almost defeated in an expensive election in 2006, he supports the current system because it’s worked well in the past.</p>
<p>“It’s not perfect and it does need to address the problem of large amounts of money coming into the system without skewing it,” he said.</p>
<p>Serving in a black robe and being addressed as “your honor” can “go to your head. It can be a humbling experience to go through elections,” he said.</p></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/16/ce-week-2-o%e2%80%99connor-urges-end-to-judicial-elections-sept-15th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>13</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #2:  &#8220;Innocent Until Executed&#8221;  Sept. 13th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/13/ce-week-2-innocent-until-executed-sept-13th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/13/ce-week-2-innocent-until-executed-sept-13th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 00:25:00 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crime]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Supreme Court]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=989</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[We have no right to exoneration.

By Dahlia Lithwick &#124; NEWSWEEK     Published Sep 3, 2009
For years, death-penalty opponents and supporters have been working their way toward a moment in which each side would rethink things. They were seeking a case in which a clearly innocent defendant was wrongly put to death. In a 2005 Supreme Court case [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><em><strong>We have no right to exoneration.</strong></em></div>
<div>
<p><em><strong>By </strong><strong><a href="http://search.newsweek.com/search?byline=dahlia%20lithwick">Dahlia Lithwick</a> | <span>NEWSWEEK     Published Sep 3, 2009</span></strong></em></div>
<p>For years, death-penalty opponents and supporters have been working their way toward a moment in which each side would rethink things. They were seeking a case in which a clearly innocent defendant was wrongly put to death. In a 2005 Supreme Court case that actually had nothing to do with the execution of innocents, Justices David Souter and Antonin Scalia tangled over the possibility that such a creature even existed. Souter fretted that &#8220;the period starting in 1989 has seen repeated exonerations of convicts under death sentences, in numbers never imagined before the development of DNA tests.&#8221; To which Scalia retorted: &#8220;The dissent makes much of the newfound capacity of DNA testing to establish innocence. But in every case of an executed defendant of which I am aware, that technology has confirmed guilt.&#8221; Scalia went on to blast &#8220;sanctimonious&#8221; death-penalty opponents and a 1987 study on innocent exonerations whose &#8220;obsolescence began at the moment of publication,&#8221; then concluded that there was not &#8220;a single case—not one—in which it is clear that a person was executed for a crime he did not commit.&#8221;</p>
<p>This suggested that if anyone found such a case, the Scalias of the world would rethink matters. As of today, the Innocence Project, a national organization dedicated to exonerating the wrongfully convicted through DNA testing, claims there have been 241 postconviction DNA exonerations, of which 17 were former death-row inmates spared execution. The gap between their facts and Scalia&#8217;s widens every year. And now we may have found that case of an innocent put to death: Cameron Todd Willingham, executed by the state of Texas in 2004 for allegedly setting a 1991 house fire that killed his three young daughters.</p>
<div><!--AD BEGIN--></p>
<div>
<div><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
placeAd2(commercialNode,'bigbox',false,'')
// ]]&gt;</script><script src="http://ad.doubleclick.net/adj/nwswk.printthis;dir=printthis;ad=bb;del=js;ajax=n;dcopt=ist;heavy=n;pageId=nwswk-id-214833-output-print;poe=no;undefinedfromrss=n;rss=n;front=n;pos=bigbox;sz=300x250;tile=1;ord=661489752303993500?"></script><!-- Template Id = 290 Template Name = Banner Creative (Flash) - Multiple clickTag URL --> <!-- Copyright 2002 DoubleClick Inc., All rights reserved. See comments in code to assist with trafficking. --><script src="http://m1.2mdn.net/879366/flashwrite_1_2.js"></script><noscript></noscript></div>
</div>
<p><!--AD END--></div>
<p>David Grann, who wrote a <a href="http://www.newyorker.com/reporting/2009/09/07/090907fa_fact_grann" target="_blank">remarkable piece about the case in last week&#8217;s <em>New Yorker</em></a>, sifted through the evidence against Willingham to reveal that the entire prosecution was a train wreck. And at every step in his appeal, Willingham&#8217;s claims of innocence were met with the response that he&#8217;d already had more than enough due process for a baby killer.</p>
<p>But you needn&#8217;t take Grann&#8217;s word for it. In 2004 Gerald Hurst, an acclaimed scientist and fire investigator, conducted an independent investigation of the evidence in the Willingham case and came away with little doubt that it was an accidental fire—likely caused by a space heater or bad wiring. Hurst found no evidence of arson, and wrote a report to try to stay the execution. According to documents obtained by the Innocence Project, it appears nobody at the state Board of Pardons and Paroles or the Texas governor&#8217;s office even took note of Hurst&#8217;s conclusions. Just before Willingham was executed, he told the Associated Press, &#8220;[T]he most distressing thing is the state of Texas will kill an innocent man and doesn&#8217;t care they&#8217;re making a mistake.&#8221;</p>
<p>Since Willingham&#8217;s death, two other independent inquiries found no evidence of arson. In 2007 the state of Texas commissioned another renowned arson expert, Craig Beyler, to examine the Willingham evidence. Beyler&#8217;s report, issued two weeks ago, concluded that investigators had no scientific basis for claiming the fire was arson.</p>
<p>One might think that all this would give a boost to death-penalty opponents, who have long contended that conclusive proof of an innocent murdered by the state would fundamentally change the debate. But that was before the goalposts began to shift this summer. In June, by a 5–4 margin, the Supreme Court ruled that a prisoner did not have a constitutional right to demand DNA testing of evidence in police files, even at his own expense. <em><strong>&#8220;A criminal defendant proved guilty after a fair trial does not have the same liberty interests as a free man,&#8221; wrote Chief Justice John Roberts.</strong></em> And two months later, <em><strong>Justices Scalia and Clarence Thomas</strong></em> went even further when the Supreme Court ordered a new hearing in Troy Davis&#8217;s murder case, after seven of nine eyewitnesses recanted their testimony. Justice Scalia, dissenting from that order, wrote for himself and Thomas, <em><strong>&#8220;[T]his court has never held that the Constitution forbids the execution of a convicted defendant who has had a full and fair trial but is later able to convince a habeas court that he is &#8216;actually&#8217; innocent.&#8221;</strong></em></p>
<p>As a constitutional matter, Scalia&#8217;s assertion is not wrong. The court has never found a constitutional right for the actually innocent to be free from execution. When the court flirted with the question in 1993, a majority ruled against the accused, but Chief Justice William Rehnquist left open the possibility that it may be unconstitutional to execute someone with a &#8220;truly persuasive demonstration&#8221; of innocence. Now, in Scalia&#8217;s America, the Cameron Todd Willingham whose very existence was once in doubt is legally irrelevant. We may execute a man for an accidental house fire, while the Constitution itself stands silently by.</p>
<p><strong>Lithwick also writes for slate.com.</strong></p>
<p><!-- Omniture --><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[</p>
<p>			var nw_page_name = "nw - article - 214833 - Innocent Until Executed";
			var nw_section = "culture";
			var nw_subsection = "culture - dahlia lithwick on legal issues";
			var nw_content_type = "article";
			var nw_source = "newsweek mag";
			var nw_search_result_count = "0";
			var nw_content_id = "214833";
			var nw_headline = "Innocent Until Executed";
			var nw_author = "dahlia lithwick";
			var nw_page_num = "print format";
			var nw_application = "gutenberg";
			var nw_hierarchy = "culture|dahlia lithwick on legal issues|articles";
			var nw_pub_date = "Thursday September 3, 2009";
// ]]&gt;</script></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/13/ce-week-2-innocent-until-executed-sept-13th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>42</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #2:  &#8220;Compromises on table in Obama health plan&#8221;  Sept. 10th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/12/ce-week-2-compromises-on-table-in-obama-health-plan-sept-10th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/12/ce-week-2-compromises-on-table-in-obama-health-plan-sept-10th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 00:02:16 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A Challenge]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=965</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Government program endorsed, not required
 Margaret Talev, David Lightman And William Douglas      / McClatchy 
Tags: Barack Obama congress health care health care reform

President Barack Obama addresses a joint session of Congress at the U.S. Capitol in Washington on Wednesday.
Behind him are Vice President Joe Biden and House Speaker Nancy Pelosi.


Highlights of Obama’s plan
Key points of the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h5><strong>Government program endorsed, not required</strong></h5>
<div><span> Margaret Talev, David Lightman And William Douglas      / McClatchy </span></div>
<div><span style="margin-right: 3px;">Tags:</span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/barack-obama">Barack Obama</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/congress">congress</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/health-care">health care</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/health-care-reform">health care reform</a></span></div>
<div><img src="http://media.spokesman.com/photos/2009/09/10/Obama_cit10_09-10-2009_6VGV19G_t210.jpg?74a72ef94756bccc16ea1c78066b52f96b62dbc7" alt="" /></div>
<div>President Barack Obama addresses a joint session of Congress at the U.S. Capitol in Washington on Wednesday.</div>
<div>Behind him are Vice President Joe Biden and House Speaker Nancy Pelosi.</div>
<div>
<div>
<h3>Highlights of Obama’s plan</h3>
<p>Key points of the health care plan that President Barack Obama outlined in his speech Wednesday:</p>
<p><em>Current coverage: </em>Those with employer-provided coverage or are insured through Medicare, Medicaid or the Veterans Administration would not be required to change their plans or doctors.</p>
<p><em>Cost: </em>About $900 billion over 10 years.</p>
<p><em>How it would be paid for:</em> By finding “savings within the existing health care system,” mostly by trimming waste and rooting out fraud. Also, insurers would be charged a fee for their priciest policies.</p>
<p><em>Health insurance exchanges: </em>Consumers and small businesses without coverage could comparison shop at these marketplaces among private and perhaps also public plans. The competition is supposed to help lower prices. The exchanges would take effect in four years.</p>
<p><em>Pre-existing conditions:</em> Insurers would not be permitted to deny coverage because of pre-existing medical conditions. Nor could they cancel or dilute coverage when people get very sick.</p>
<p><em>Affordability:</em> No limits on how much coverage a consumer could get in a year or a lifetime – but limits on out-of-pocket health care expenses. Tax credits would be available for those needing aid.</p>
<p><em>Preventive medicine: </em>Insurers must cover, at no extra charge, regular checkups and preventive care, such as mammograms and colonoscopies.</p>
<p><em>Public option: </em>People without coverage would be able to choose a not-for-profit government-run insurance plan that would have the same rules and protections that private insurers do. A government option plan might be available only if private insurers fail to meet coverage benchmarks in designated markets. Alternatively, a nonprofit co-op might administer a competitive insurance plan.</p>
<p><em>Catastrophic insurance:</em> Low-cost coverage would be available in the years before the exchanges are created to protect against financial ruin in case of a serious illness.</p>
<p><em>Individual insurance mandates: </em>Everyone would have to have basic insurance. Most businesses would be required to offer insurance or “chip in” to help cover workers. Only hardship cases and some small businesses would be exempt.</p>
<p><em><strong>McClatchy</strong></em></div>
</div>
<p>WASHINGTON – President Barack Obama on Wednesday laid out a series of compromises he’s willing to make to get a health care overhaul through a nervous Congress this year, including diluting his vision for a new public insurance program and embracing ideas floated by Republicans.</p>
<p>In an address to a joint session of Congress, Obama tried to seize control of the Democratic Party’s highest domestic priority after months of party disarray and raucous public debate across the country. The president said that he’d require all individuals to have health insurance and would provide tax credits to people and small businesses that couldn’t afford it.</p>
<p>“Well, the time for bickering is over. The time for games has passed. Now is the season for action,” Obama said.</p>
<p>At one point, a South Carolina Republican congressman shouted, “You lie” when Obama characterized reports that he’d insure illegal immigrants as false.</p>
<p>On perhaps the most controversial single plank in his program, Obama endorsed creating a “public option” government program to compete against private insurers, but he didn’t insist that it be included.</p>
<p>Instead, he left room for alternatives that liberal Democrats in Congress are resisting. Those include creating nonprofit health care cooperatives; a “trigger” mechanism for a public option to kick in later if private insurers fail to meet benchmarks of coverage; or perhaps simply tightening regulations on private insurers.</p>
<p>He pledged that any “public option” wouldn’t weaken coverage for those in Medicare or insured through their employers. He promised them “more security and stability.”</p>
<p>In turn, Obama made it clear that he intends to work with congressional Democrats to push some health care plan through Congress this year – on a bare partisan majority if necessary.</p>
<p>“I am not the first president to take up this cause, but I am determined to be the last,” Obama said in remarks that he hoped would breathe new life into Democrats’ push to expand coverage to many of the roughly 46 million in the U.S. who now lack health insurance.</p>
<p>“We are the only advanced democracy on Earth, the only nation, that allows such hardships for millions of people,” he said. “Now is the season for action.”</p>
<p>Such an expansion is a goal that’s eluded presidents since Harry Truman, and, most recently, Bill Clinton 15 years ago.</p>
<p>Obama said that his plan would cost about $900 billion over a decade. He said it could be paid for mostly by eliminating “waste and abuse” from the existing health care system, but he wasn’t specific. In addition, he’d charge insurance companies “a fee for their most expensive policies” to fund his plan. Beyond that, he failed to specify how his proposals would slow rising health costs.</p>
<p>Three House of Representatives committees have written legislation that would create a public option, raise taxes on the wealthy to help pay for the plan and mandate coverage for most people. The House is expected to combine three pending Democratic bills into one piece of legislation and attempt to pass it this month.</p>
<p>The Senate outlook is cloudier and likely to take longer. Even if both chambers pass versions of the legislation, they’re all but certain to differ, requiring a House-Senate conference to draft a compromise version that each house then must pass. How that will happen or what final terms it may contain aren’t clear.</p>
<p>Fleshing out a framework that he’s been advocating for months now, Obama called for creating a government health insurance exchange, or marketplace, to take effect by 2013. Through it many Americans could obtain lower-cost private coverage – or possibly coverage through some variation of a public plan if Congress creates one.</p>
<p>Until the exchange would take effect, Obama would borrow from a plan that his 2008 Republican rival, Arizona Sen. John McCain, proposed last year – to provide catastrophic coverage for those with pre-existing conditions.</p>
<p>In another olive branch to Republicans, Obama indicated that he’d support some “demonstration projects” to try setting experimental limits on medical malpractice lawsuits – long a Republican goal that Democrats typically oppose.</p>
<p>Obama also called for new regulations on private insurers to protect patients. He told Americans that any plan he signs will:</p>
<p>•Ban insurance companies from denying coverage because of pre-existing conditions.</p>
<p>•Prevent insurers from dropping or watering down coverage during illness.</p>
<p>•End arbitrary annual or lifetime coverage caps.</p>
<p>•Limit out-of-pocket expenses.</p>
<p>•Require insurers to cover routine checkups, mammograms and colonoscopies.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/12/ce-week-2-compromises-on-table-in-obama-health-plan-sept-10th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #1:  UPDATE &#8211; &#8220;Partner benefits closer to vote&#8221;</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/09/ce-week-1-update-partner-benefits-closer-to-vote/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/09/ce-week-1-update-partner-benefits-closer-to-vote/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 09 Sep 2009 23:06:21 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Class Activities/Discussion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Religion]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=962</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Judge rejects challenge to Referendum 71
 Rachel La Corte      / Associated Press 
Tags: 2009 election domestic partnerships R-71 Referendum 71



Law on hold
The domestic partnership expansion was supposed to take effect on July 26, but the referendum campaign put it on hold. If the referendum does appear on the ballot, the law would take effect only [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h5><strong>Judge rejects challenge to Referendum 71</strong></h5>
<div><span> Rachel La Corte      / Associated Press </span></div>
<div><span style="margin-right: 3px;">Tags:</span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/2009-election">2009 election</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/domestic-partnerships">domestic partnerships</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/r-71">R-71</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/referendum-71">Referendum 71</a></span></div>
<div id="story-body">
<div>
<div>
<h3>Law on hold</h3>
<p>The domestic partnership expansion was supposed to take effect on July 26, but the referendum campaign put it on hold. If the referendum does appear on the ballot, the law would take effect only if approved by voters Nov. 3.</p>
<p>As of this week, more than 5,900 domestic partnerships have been filed with the state since the law took effect in 2007.</p></div>
</div>
<p>OLYMPIA – A judge on Tuesday refused to block a public vote on expanded domestic partnership benefits for gay couples in Washington state.</p>
<p>Thurston County Superior Court Judge Thomas McPhee rejected the arguments of Washington Families Standing Together, a gay-rights group that claimed Secretary of State Sam Reed improperly accepted thousands of petition signatures that supported putting Referendum 71 on the ballot.</p>
<p>The referendum would put the Legislature’s latest expansion of domestic partnership rights for gay couples on the November ballot.</p>
<p>Washington Families Standing Together chairwoman Anne Levinson said her group hasn’t decided whether to appeal.</p>
<p>“We would only appeal if we could do so swiftly and if we determined that’s the most helpful way to support these families under attack by these groups right now,” she said.</p>
<p>State elections officials have said that all legal challenges need to be completed by Thursday because they need to begin printing materials for the Nov. 3 general election.</p>
<p>“Time is short,” said state elections director Nick Handy. “It’s really time to let the voters make a decision about this issue.”</p>
<p>Referendum 71, sponsored by a conservative political group called Protect Marriage Washington, would ask voters to approve or reject the “everything but marriage” domestic partnership law that state lawmakers passed earlier this year.</p>
<p>The new law would add more legal rights to the state’s established domestic partnerships for gay couples, putting registered partners on par with married couples under state law. Some unmarried heterosexual couples also could register as domestic partners.</p>
<p>A “yes” vote on R-71 would put the newest law into place, and a “no” vote would reject it. The underlying laws laying out domestic partnerships – enacted in 2007 and broadened once already in 2008 – would not be affected.</p>
<p>Levinson’s group argued that tens of thousands of signatures may have been invalid, pointing specifically to the way signature-gatherers filled out their petitions.</p>
<p>By law, the petitions must include a statement that professes all of the voter signatures were gathered properly.</p>
<p>In some cases, those declarations were not signed, or simply rubber-stamped with a sponsor’s signature moments before they were turned in to the state.</p>
<p>Reed has accepted petitions without signed declarations since 2006, under legal guidance from the state attorney general. McPhee sided with the state, noting that while state law makes clear the declaration must appear on the petition, it “does not require that the declaration be completed or signed by a signature gatherer.”</p>
<p>He also rejected an argument that Reed improperly counted signatures from people who weren’t registered voters when they signed the petitions.</p>
<p>McPhee said a time lag between sending in a voter registration card and the receipt of the petitions makes it impossible to know when the 43 people in question were actually registered.</p>
<p>“All this does is illustrate the uncertainty by which our present system tracks the date of petition signing compared to the date of registration,” he said.</p></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/09/ce-week-1-update-partner-benefits-closer-to-vote/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>CE Week #1:  &#8220;Had enough of Medicare&#8221;  Sept. 5th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/07/ce-week-1-had-enough-of-medicare-sept-5th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/07/ce-week-1-had-enough-of-medicare-sept-5th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 07 Sep 2009 13:58:24 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Economics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=950</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[ by Dr. Donald F. Condon      / Special to The Spokesman-Review 

I am a primary care physician, board-certified in family practice. I am a self-employed solo practitioner with a physician’s assistant. I have been practicing medicine in Spokane for 30 years. For the first time I will not renew my [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><span> <strong>by Dr. Donald F. Condon      / Special to The Spokesman-Review </strong></span></div>
<div id="story-body">
<p>I am a primary care physician, board-certified in family practice. I am a self-employed solo practitioner with a physician’s assistant. I have been practicing medicine in Spokane for 30 years. For the first time I will not renew my contract with Medicare when it expires on Oct. 1. In this time of discussion about health care reform, I feel the public should know how this government system impacts physicians.</p>
<p>The primary problem with Medicare is simply this: Medicare doesn’t pay. Reimbursement for care is 35 to 50 cents on the dollar of charges submitted. This doesn’t cover overhead. It costs more to provide care for a Medicare patient than the reimbursement schedule pays.</p>
<p>Medicare constitutes 20 percent of my schedule, but since Medicare patients are, generally speaking, more complex, it often requires 30 percent of my time.</p>
<p>Medicare payments represent 5 percent of my income, so that means 25 percent of my day I am working for free. This busyness does not mean business is good. My practice population is aging and matriculating into Medicare coverage, threatening the viability of my practice.</p>
<p>I have worked with Medicare for 30 years, feeling I was doing my part. If ever there was such an obligation, it was paid back years ago.</p>
<p>In not renewing my Medicare contract, I am rejecting a faulty insurance system, not the patient. My patients are invited to stay on with the understanding that they will be responsible for their bill, and many have elected to do so. I do understand that many on Medicare do not have an alternative.</p>
<p>Each year I have to decide which insurance companies with whom to participate. Unfortunately, Medicare is no longer a responsible choice.</p>
<p>I have a responsibility to remain viable as a business. I have a responsibility to my family and myself, my staff and their families, my other patients, the owner of the building from whom I rent, the bank from whom I borrow to keep my practice up to date, other health care providers to whom I refer, to laboratories and imaging businesses which I use, and the list goes on. If I fail, many will feel the ripple effect.</p>
<p>There are other problems with Medicare besides their reimbursement schedule.</p>
<p>Medicare is out of touch: Clerks operating from models established by committees who have not seen the patient decide what is covered, how much is covered and for whom it is covered. The physician, who actually sees the patient, is trained to diagnose and prescribe, may be and often is overruled by a clerk.</p>
<p>Medicare is irresponsible and not held accountable: About two years ago Medicare prematurely launched a new computer program that was not ready to handle its own billing requirements. The consequence to my practice was that over $60,000 in charges was not paid for over six months.</p>
<p>Medicare is restrictive: Medicare will not allow patients to submit a bill from a non-contracted physician. This would allow patients to stay with a non-contracted physician and give them a greater choice of physicians.</p>
<p>Medicare is unprofitable: Contracted physicians must accept what Medicare pays as payment in full and cannot bill the patient or a secondary insurance for additional charges that would make it profitable to care for Medicare patients.</p>
<p>Medicare interferes with the doctor-patient relationship: Medicare instructs patients to report physicians they feel may be overbilling. This is an unfair burden on the patient.</p>
<p>Medicare is unfriendly: Medicare threatens fines of $25,000 per incident for any billing infraction as defined by Medicare clerks.</p>
<p>Medicare is arbitrary: Office visits are routinely downgraded to pay less.</p>
<p>Medicare is bureaucratic: I am now required to sign an “opt-out” contract stating that I am not going to sign a contract. I need to repeat this every two years.</p>
<p>I know of no other industry that is as mistreated as the health care industry. Government and military contract winners expect a profit, sometimes even large profits. Only the health care industry, charged with the health of the nation, is expected to subsidize the government.</p>
<p>Most of the physicians I know are generous and serving; that is why they are in health care. The Medicare system has taken advantage of the generosity of the physician for far too long. The current administration claims that physicians are paid too much and proposes to pay even less. This does not inspire confidence that the current administration understands the business of health care. As the business goes so goes the health care. In Spokane, for instance, more physicians are leaving the area than are coming in.</p>
<p>It is time to stop enabling a fundamentally flawed model by participating in it. Like giving alcohol to an alcoholic, it is time to say no – enough is enough.</p></div>
<p><em>Dr. Donald F. Condon is a physician in Spokane. </em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/07/ce-week-1-had-enough-of-medicare-sept-5th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Summer CE Week #2:  &#8220;Partner rights headed to ballot&#8221;  Sept. 1st</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/01/summer-ce-week-2-partner-rights-headed-to-ballot-sept-1st/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/01/summer-ce-week-2-partner-rights-headed-to-ballot-sept-1st/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 02 Sep 2009 04:21:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Federalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Health Care]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Institutions]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=934</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[‘Everything but marriage’ referendum, still facing court hurdle, would come in November
 Rachel La Corte      / Associated Press 
Tags: 2009 election domestic partnerships R-71 Referendum 71

OLYMPIA – Expanded domestic partnerships for same-sex couples could face a public vote after Washington officials ruled that referendum sponsors have enough voter support to force a referendum on [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h5>‘Everything but marriage’ referendum, still facing court hurdle, would come in November</h5>
<div><span> Rachel La Corte      / Associated Press </span></div>
<div><span style="margin-right: 3px;">Tags:</span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/2009-election">2009 election</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/domestic-partnerships">domestic partnerships</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/r-71">R-71</a></span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/referendum-71">Referendum 71</a></span></div>
<div id="story-body">
<p>OLYMPIA – Expanded domestic partnerships for same-sex couples could face a public vote after Washington officials ruled that referendum sponsors have enough voter support to force a referendum on the November ballot.</p>
<p>The new partnership law, nicknamed “everything but marriage” by its supporters, would broaden domestic partnerships by granting gay and lesbian couples all the remaining state-provided benefits that presently apply only to married heterosexual couples.</p>
<p>After a month of counting petition signatures, the secretary of state’s office said Monday that Referendum 71 had 121,617 valid voter signatures – more than a thousand more than needed to advance to the general election.</p>
<p>The tally could increase as rejected signatures are double-checked, but that won’t be the final word. Supporters of expanded domestic partnerships asked a King County Superior Court judge on Monday to at least temporarily block the referendum from the ballot, arguing that election officials have accepted thousands of invalid petition signatures. Judge Julie Spector said she would rule early Wednesday, the same day Secretary of State Sam Reed said he’ll certify the referendum to the ballot.</p>
<p>State Sen. Ed Murray, D-Seattle, who has spearheaded domestic partnership efforts in the state, called it a “tragic day for the state, where we will put the rights of a group of our citizens up for a vote.”</p>
<p>Nevertheless, Murray predicted victory: “We’re going to fight and I believe we’re going to win, but it’s going to be very difficult,” he said.</p>
<p>The new law was supposed to take effect July 26. But the referendum campaign put it on hold, and the law can now take effect only if approved by state voters Nov. 3.</p>
<p>Gov. Chris Gregoire said that while she respected the referendum process she was “very disappointed that this message will be debated once again.”</p>
<p>“I signed the original bill and believe it should be and will be the law of our great state,” she said in a written statement.</p>
<p>Rights granted under the latest phase of domestic partnerships range from adoption and child support to public employment benefits – although any benefits that cost the state money, such as pensions, are delayed until 2014 because of the state’s recession-fueled budget problems.</p>
<p>The underlying domestic partnership law, which the Legislature passed in 2007, provided hospital visitation rights, the ability to authorize autopsies and organ donations, and inheritance rights when there is no will.</p>
<p>Last year, lawmakers expanded that law to give domestic partners standing under laws covering probate and trusts, community property and guardianship. Opposite-gender seniors also can register as domestic partners.</p>
<p>If rejected at the polls, R-71 wouldn’t overturn those first two phases of domestic partnerships. But a failure in November would roll back the additional rights approved earlier this year under the “everything but marriage” law, which puts domestic partners on par with married couples in all areas of state law that deal with marriage rights.</p>
<p>Opponents of the law say overturning it will help stop full-fledged gay marriage from gaining a foothold in the state.</p>
<p>“We’re not trying to keep anyone from having anything, we’re simply trying to keep marriage from being redefined,” said Gary Randall, of Protect Washington Families, which pushed to get the referendum on the ballot. “The wrong side of the issue is to redefine marriage.”</p>
<p>As of this week, more than 5,800 domestic partnership registrations had been filed in Washington since the first law took effect in July 2007.</p>
<p>A political group called WhoSigned.Org has said it will publish online the names of people who signed petitions to get the referendum on the ballot. The petition-listing effort is not supported by the official campaign that had tried to keep R-71 off the ballot.</p>
<p>A federal judge has granted a temporary restraining order to bar the release of signatures on R-71 petitions, and a hearing on that case will be held in Tacoma on Thursday.</p></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/09/01/summer-ce-week-2-partner-rights-headed-to-ballot-sept-1st/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>46</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Summer CE Week #2:  &#8220;Freedom to say what school officials allow&#8221;  Aug. 24th</title>
		<link>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/08/30/summer-ce-week-2-freedom-to-say-what-school-officials-allow-aug-24th/</link>
		<comments>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/08/30/summer-ce-week-2-freedom-to-say-what-school-officials-allow-aug-24th/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 30 Aug 2009 22:31:41 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>pkautzman</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[A MUST READ]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Civil Liberties/Rights]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Opinion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[The Supreme Court]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/?p=911</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[ Linda P. Campbell 
Tags: column

I’m still trying to get my head around the idea that a public school can ban a student from wearing a T-shirt with the First Amendment printed on the back.
Where is that written in the Constitution?
“Congress shall make no law …” isn’t really an anything-goes license for expression. But surely even limits [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div><span> <em>Linda P. Campbell </em></span></div>
<div><span style="margin-right: 3px;">Tags:</span> <span><a href="http://www.spokesman.com/tags/column">column</a></span></div>
<div id="story-body">
<p>I’m still trying to get my head around the idea that a public school can ban a student from wearing a T-shirt with the First Amendment printed on the back.</p>
<p>Where is that written in the Constitution?</p>
<p>“Congress shall make no law …” isn’t really an anything-goes license for expression. But surely even limits on students’ speech must themselves abide by reasonable limits.</p>
<p>Most of the news stories I’ve seen about the lawsuit Pete Palmer and his parents filed against the Waxahachie, Texas, school district have focused on his being told his “John Edwards for President” shirt violated the high school’s dress code.</p>
<p>Not so highlighted is the fact that officials also rejected a shirt flaunting the text of the First Amendment.</p>
<p>And a three-judge panel of the 5th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals last week said it would not issue a preliminary injunction against enforcing the ban.</p>
<p>If you analyze the case by just applying sterile legal tests, I suppose, maybe you can reach that conclusion.</p>
<p>As court papers describe the dispute, Palmer was a sophomore who showed up at school in September 2007 wearing a black T-shirt that read “San Diego.”</p>
<p>An assistant principal said he was violating the dress code’s no-messages provision, so his father brought him a T-shirt with a logo resembling a John Edwards ’08 bumper sticker.</p>
<p>Couldn’t wear that one either. Palmer and his lawyer-father couldn’t convince various district officials that the code should exempt clearly political messages that weren’t disruptive, lewd or advocating illegal behavior.</p>
<p>So the family sued.</p>
<p>Under a revised dress code, students could no longer tout their favorite college or pro team but could flash political buttons, bumper stickers or wristbands. That was supposed to compensate for not being able to wear even an Edwards for President polo shirt or a T-shirt with “Freedom of Speech” on the front and the First Amendment on the back, both of which officials rejected, according to the 5th Circuit.</p>
<p>In a series of rulings, the most famous of which is Tinker v. Des Moines School District in 1969, the Supreme Court has said that students don’t shed their constitutional free-speech rights at the schoolhouse gate.</p>
<p>But none of those cases really matter for Waxahachie, it turns out, because the dress code bars all messages – innocuous, popular or controversial – that aren’t related to school teams, groups or activities.</p>
<p>That makes it viewpoint-neutral, the 5th Circuit said, and therefore a pretty straightforward call: Promotes an important government interest; doesn’t aim to suppress speech; and is not broader than necessary.</p>
<p>This ruling also makes me wonder where the court will go with another dress code brouhaha in which students and their parents decided to pick a fight.</p>
<p>A different three-judge panel heard arguments in February over whether Burleson (Texas) High School could require a pair of students to leave their Confederate flag purses home.</p>
<p>This is not a content-neutral rule; it admittedly targeted displays that officials said had caused too much racial hostility and turmoil to be allowed at school.</p>
<p>The girls, who’ve since graduated, have argued that the amount of conflict has been exaggerated, the school doesn’t uniformly police inappropriate displays and, in any event, displaying the flag promotes healthy discussion.</p>
<p>It would be just perverse if a federal appeals court were to let Waxahachie ban the First Amendment on a shirt but require Burleson to allow Confederate flag-emblazoned purses.</p>
<p>But it wouldn’t be the first time the First Amendment’s been stood on its head.</p></div>
<p><em>Linda P. Campbell is a columnist for the Fort Worth Star- Telegram. Her e-mail address is  <a href="mailto:lcampbell@star-telegram.com">lcampbell@star-telegram.com</a>. </em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://pkautzman.edublogs.org/2009/08/30/summer-ce-week-2-freedom-to-say-what-school-officials-allow-aug-24th/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>34</slash:comments>
		</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
